Cessna_Caravan_II F406 POH 1986 Cessna Caravan II

User Manual: Cessna_Caravan_II-F406-POH-1986

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 692

DownloadCessna_Caravan_II-F406-POH-1986 Cessna Caravan II-F406-POH-1986
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
ZI

uessnal

Information Manual

Cessna Aircraft Company

A

Memb€r ol GAMA

Model406

THIS MANUAL INCORPORATES INFORMATION

ISSUED

THRU REVISION 2 TO THE PILOT'S OPERATING HANDBOOK
AND FAA APPROVED AIBPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL DATED 1

JULY 1986.

COPYRIGHT O !995

C€ssna Aircraft Company
Wichita, Kansas USA
Original lssue - 1 Julv 1986
Dt624-13

MODEL 406

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS

CONTENTS
SECTION

1 GENERAL
2-L
2 LIMITATIONS.......
3-1
3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ... "
4-l
4 NORMAL PROCEDURES .....
o-r
5 PERFORMANCE ..
6-1
6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE
? DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS 7-l
8-1
8 HANDLING,SERVICEANDMAINTENANCE
9-1
9 SUPPLEMENTS ..
Index-1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX .. "
.

.

Contents

Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986

SECTION

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

SECTION I
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

..,.....7-2
DRAWING
........1-3
INTRODUCTION
.......1.4
ENGINES
.......... l-4
PROPELLERS
........1-5
FUEL..
....'.....1-6
- oIL .
.... 1-6
L.raxluuM cERTIFICATED wEIGHTS
....,.. 1-8
STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
CABIN, BAGGAGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS . . . . . . , . , . . . 1-9
...1-11
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY ....... 1.11
....... 1-11
General Airspeed Terminology and Symbols
.....1-13
Meteorological Terminology
.......1-14
Power Terminology ....
Engine Controls and Instruments Terminology
'.... 1-15
Airplane Performance and Flight Planning Terminology . . . . 1-16
.....1-1?
Weight and Balance Terminology ...
THREE-VIEW

=r

Originat tssue - 1 July 1986

1-1

SECTION

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

1.

NORMAL PROPELLER
TIP TO GROUND
CLEARANCE IS 0.85
TOTAL WING AREA
INCLUOING NACELLES AND
FUSELAGE WITHIN THE WING
PLANFORM IS 252.74 SQUABE
I\,IINIMUM TURNING DISTANCE IS
FEET. REFER TO FIGURE
7-t1 FOR ADOITION
INFORMATION.

63.39

*

l\,iAxll\,lUl\,1 HEIGHT OF

AIRPLANE WITH NOSE GEAR
DEPRESSED IS I3.93 FEET.

13.15'*

12.4e'J

Figure l.-1
THRED-VIEW DRAWING
Original lssue

NOTICE
AT THE TIME OF ISSUANCE, THIS INFOR.
MATION MANUAL WAS AN EXACT DUPLI.
CATE OF THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S OPERAT.
ING HANDBOOK AND FAA APPROVED
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL AND IS TO BE
USED FOR GENERAL PURPOSES ONLY.

IT wILL .|GI

U

KEPT CURRENT AND,
THEREFORE, CANNOT BE USED AS A
SUBSTITUTE FOR THE OFFICIAL PILOT'S
OPERATING HANDBOOK AND FAA
APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
INTENDED FOR OPERATION OF THE AIR.
PLANE..

CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY
ORIGINAL ISSUE - 1 JULY 1986

INTRODUCTION

MODEL 406

PERFORI,IANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS

PERFORMANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS
WXIGHT:

. ....

. .. ..
w;ishr
.
.

Meximum Rimo weisht
.
Malisrum Takebff
Miximurn Landine weiel't . .. .
Miiimum zero friet w;rshi
- With zerc wing Locker
SPEED At 8300 Pounds
. .. . .
Power
at
15,000
Manimurn Cruise
RANGE For 4?5 Gallons Usable At 6 7 Pounds per Galon (3183 pounds)
Cruise Power
Msximum
-

-

Payload

Feet

-A-10,000

..

......1027

Feet

At 20,000 Feet

..

..

1281

9435 Pounds
9360 Pounds
9360 Pounds
8500 Pound8

..

216 KTAS

Nauticall{ileg
236 KTAS
NauticalJvlihr
244 KTAS

--If

-Maximum Raose Power

io,000

f""t .........

At 20,000 Feet

... -...

u87 Nauti-,lviler

.....

1652 Neulical Miles
8.54 Hours

180 KTAS

194 KTAS

.

... .
..
. ...

1851 Feet Per Minutr
996 Feet Per Minut€

Above 30,000 Eeet

otal

LANDING
ST

: :. : .. :. :. :. bii,. i;J;d; p".'.uS"l"'FlS
...
. ::::::,idi.s81fi"::ii*t"J"Ltw;i:i
.
.

1f9l . : :. : :.
rit ir.
er

Eneine)

...:..:.,

:

.

..,

9 2

quartg

PRATT and WHITNEY CANADA INC.
urbine enclnes. flat rated to 500 shaft hoBepower at 1900 propeller RPM

sp"i,],

r,ii ;r;i ai,t ii"idi,iii'!, ii"*iii,r", ir,.i,i-br,i

i"ir, i:zb r#10515-2

rr; reserve
Itanee dats includes allowances for start, taxi, tskeoff, (iu,u, desc€nt and 45 '.l1?.at tFe particular cruisp power and altitude. Speeds shown sre ai mid-cmbe weigbt.
The above oerformance fiqures are bssed on lhe indicst€d weights strndqd atomslh€ric
conditions, level hard surfaie dry runways and no wind. They are cal.ulatecl values denved
fmm flighi uesls conduced by'the Ce;na Aireraft Cop.-numerow
-,1 urder carefiilv- dorumenled
factors allecting flight
conaitiois a"d wiu vary with individual airplanes anti
p€dormance.

1 June 1988

I

SECTION

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

INTRODUCTION
This handbook consists of 9 sections and an alphabetical index as
shown on the Contents page. This handbook includes the material
required to be turnished to the pilot by FAR Part 23 and SFAR 41. It
also c-ontgins supplemental data. supplied.b.y Ces^sna Aircraft Company.
Specific information can be rapidly found by referring to the Con-tenis
page tor the appropriate section. then referring to the Table Of Contents
9rl ,ths ,{irs!-pqge of the appropriate section, or by the use of the
Arpnaoelrcal rnoex.

IIOTE

This hand.book includes the rnaterial reouired to
furnished to the pilot by the Federal Auiation
Regulations and additionil inlormation prouid.ed
by Cessna Aircraft Company and constiiutes the
FAA Approued Airplane Flight ManuaL
be

This handbook is not intended to be a zuide for basic flieht instruction or a training rnanual and should not be used as one. lt is not a
substitute. for alequate _and competent flight instruction, knowledge of
current airworthiness directives, applicable federal air regulations or
advisory circulars.

. Assuring the airworthiness of the airplane is the responsibility of the
airplane owner. Determining if the airplane is safe for nisha is the
responsibility of the pilot in command. The pilot is also responsible for
staying within _operating limitations as outlin;d by instrument markings,
placar&. and- this Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA Approved Airplane Flight Manual.
Section 1 of this handbook presents basic airplane data and general
information which will be of value to the nilot.

Original lssue

1-3

SECTION

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

ENGINES
Number of

Engines:

2

Manufacturer: Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc.

Encine Model

Nu-mber:
Engine Type:

PTOA-112
Free T\rbine,
Reverse Flow Z-Shafb.

Compressor Stages
- and

TVpes: 3 axial stages,

TYPe:
Turbine Stages and Type:
Combustion Chamber

I

centrifugal

stage.
-

Annular
1 stage compression'
1 stage Power

Flat rated at
500 shaft horsePower'
Takeoff and Max Continuous: 500 shaft horsepower'
Maximum Climb and Cruise: 500 shaft horsepower'

Horsepower:

PROPELLERS
Number of

Propellers:

2

PropellerManufacturer: McCauleyAccessoryDivision

Number:
Number of Blades:
Propeller Diameter:
Propelier Tlpe:

Propeller Model

9910535-2
3

7.?5

Feet

-\

Constant speed, full and,auto
leathennq' reversrDle ano
hYdraulicallY actuated.

Propel-terBladeAngle:

(At-30-Inch,StaLion)
a) I eathered 6D.D uegrees

b) Low Pitch 18.5 Degrees
c) Full Reverse -13.5 Degrees

1-4

Original lssue

sEcTtoN

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

FUEL
FUEL
GRADE (2}

JET A
JET A-1
JET 8
JP,1
JP.4
JP-5
JP-8

*AVrATroN

FOR TAKEOFF

'c

.

SPECtFtC
WEIGHT .
POUNDS PER U.S.
GALLON AT

(1)

6.7
6.7
-54
-54
-54

ASTTV-Dt655

MtL-L-56t6

(3)

MIL-T-5624
MtL-T-5624
MtL-T-831334
MIL-G-5572 AND

COLOR

60.F

ASTM-01655
ASTM.D1655

GASOLINE
{ALL GRADES)

*

FUEL
SPECIFICATIONS

MINIIiIUM FUEL
TEI''PERATURE

-54

COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS

6.8
6.7
6.0

ASTM.D91O

COLORLESS
COLORLESS
80/87 RED,
lOO GREEN,
lOOLL BLUE

Aviation gasoline (all grades) is approved
for emergency use only.
Refer to Section z foi limidation reouirements anif Se;tion 8 for
fuel servicing information. A record oT total aviation gasoline used
must be recorded in Airplane Engine Maintenance Record.

NATO equivalents of the above fuels may be used.

.AVIATION GASOLINE IS RESTRICTED
TO EMERGENCY USE AND SHALL NOI: BE
USED FOR MORE THAN 150 HOURS IN
ONE OVERHAUL PERIOD.

.A

MIXTURE OF ONE PAR'T AVIATION
GASOLINE AND THREE PARTS OF JET A.

JET A.1, OR JP-s MAY BE USED FOR
EMERGENCY PURPOSES FOR A MAXI.
MUM OF 450 HOURS PER OVERHAUL PE.
RIOD,

.AUXILIABY BOOST PUMP MUST BE ON
WHEN USING AVIATION GASOLINE.
otE

Fuel used. mLlst contain an anti-icinp additiue in
compliance with MIL-l-27686E. Refdr to Section
8 for add.itionaL inforrnation.

Total fuel capacity (U.S. gallons): 481.5
Usable tuel (U.S. gallons): 475.0

Orioinal lssue

t-c

sEcTtoN

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

otL
Refer to Section 8 for

Total Oil Capacity
(Per

Engine):

list of approved oils and specifrcations.

9.2 U.S. Quarhs

Drain and Refill
Quantity
(Fer Engine):

Approximately 8.4 U.S' Qua*s including oil filter'

Oil Quantity

O*"iiitr" Iianee:
- Fill Lo within 2 quarts of MAX HOT or MAX

COLD (as approprilte) on dipstick' Quart markings
indicate U.S. buart's low if oif is hot. For example, a
dipstick reading of 3 indicates the system ,is within 2
ou-att" of MAX if oil is cold and within 3 quarts of
MAX it ttre oil is hot.
NOTE

To obtain an accurate oil leuel reading, lt is
recommended. the oil leuel be cheched' uithin 10
minutes after engine shutdown while the oil is
or prior to the firs-thot (MAX HOT marhing)
ttisht of th.e duv while the 6iI is cold (MAX
'C1LD
mdrkinil: II rnore than 10 minutes has
since engine shutdown, and engine is
stiil uarm, perforrn an engine dry motoring run
before checking oil leueL.

ela.psed.

MAXIMUM CERTIFICATED WEIGHTS
Maximum Ramp

Weight:

Weight:
Maximum Landing Weight

Maximum Takeoff

Maximum Zero Fuel
Weisht With Zero
Wing Locker Payload:

9435 Pounds

9360 Pounds
9360 Pounds

8500 Pounds

Maximum Weights a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds
each.
in Basgase
Co-o"u?i""nt" b. Avionics Bav - 250 pounds less installed
(Staridard and
optional equipment. RBfer to the loading.
piacard in ih6 airplane avionics baggage bay.
b"iionit t"r"rior
c. Nose Bay - 350 pbunds less installed optional
Pii"enee.
Configrirations): equipment. Refer to the loading placard in the

-

1-6

airPlane nose baggage baY'

1 June 1988

SECTION

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

Refer to Figure 1-3 - 400
pounds (200 pounds per side). Maximum floor
loading is 75 pounds per square foot.
e. Aft Cabin (Bav B) Refer to Figure 1-3 - 100
pounds (50 pounds per side). Maximurn floor
loading is 75 pounds per squzue foot.

d.

Aft Cabin (Bay A)

Maximum Weights a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds
in Baggage
each.
Compartments b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed op(Cargo Interior
tional equipment. Refer to the loading placard
Configuration): in the airplane avionics baggage bay.
c. Nose Bay - 350 pounds less insta.lled optional
equipment. Refer to the loading placard in the
airplane nose baggage bay.
d. Maximum carso
load in anv 24-inch leneth of
cabin floor is -600 pounds per bay in th! five
cargo bays (Cargo A,B,C,D, & E). If the cargo
has a smooth, reasonable flat lower surface,
load densities of up to 200 pounds per square
foot may be loaded in the cargo bays. Use
pallets or beams to distribute the loads over
all seat rails if adjacent cargo bays are loaded
at a rate of over 75 pounds per square foot.
e. Aft Cabin (Bay A) - 400 pounds (200 pounds
per side). Marimun floor loading is 75 pounds
per square foot.
f. Aft C:abin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 pounds
per side). Maxirnum floor loading is 75 pounds
Der souare foot.
g. ilefer- to Section ?, Cargo loading, for add!
tional information.

STANDARD AIRPLANE WEIGHTS
Standard Empty Weight:

5033 Pounds

Basic Empty Weight:
(Ootional interior with 8 seat
configuration and standard avionics)

5136 Pounds

Basic Empty Weight:
(Optional interior with 9 seat
configuration and standard avionics)

5160 Pounds

Basic Empty Weight:
(Optional interior with 10 seat
configuration and standard avionics)

5185 Pounds

(Standard interior)

Original lssue

'l-7

SECTION

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL
Basic Emptv

Weisht:

5050 Pounds

Basic Emptv

Weight:

5067 Pounds (28 inch spacing)
5061 Pounds (31 inch spacing)

rOotional-interior with 11 seat
configuration and standard avionics)
(Ontional-interior with 12 seat
co;figuration and standard avionics)
Basic Empty Weight:
(Ootional interior with 14 seat
ioifiguration and standard avionics)
Basic Empty

Weight:

5092 Pounds

4892 Pounds

(Cargo interior)

Maximum Useful Load:
(Standard interior)*

4402 Pounds

Maximum Useful Load:
(Ontional interior with 8 seat
coifiguration and stsndard avionics)*

4299 Pounds

Maximum Usefirl Load:
(Ortional interior with 9 seat
ioifiguration and standard avionics)*

4275 Pounds

Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional intBrior with 10 seat
confrzuration and standard avionics)*

4250 Pounds

Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional interior with 11 seat
confi guration and standard avionics)*

4385 Pounds

Maximum Useful Load:
(Ontional interior with 12 seat
configuration and standard avionics)*

4368 Pounds (28 inch spacing)
43?4 Pounds (31 inch spacing)

Maximum Useful Load:
(Optional interior with 14 seat
ioirfi4rration and standard avionics)*

4343 Pounds

Maximum Useful
(Cargo interior)*

Load:

4543 Pounds

*Based On Maximum RamP Weight.

1-8

Original lssue

SECTION

MODEL 406

1

GENERAL

:ll'

!l*o

-l r-'-i
pi'" ,;n

,_r

49.0"

AND DOOR

PASSENGEB INTEBIOR

NOSE AAGGAGE

VIONICS AAY
PASSENGER INTERIOR
NOSE AAGGAGE

BAY

BAY

AB

r*r_r
43.4
40.0"

WHEEL WELL
VIONICS BAY
AND DOOR

224.9"
PASSENGER INTERIOR

. Ifgufe l-2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
CABIN. BAGGAGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

1 June 1987

60852002
60851002
60866036

1-9

sEcTroN

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

50.6"(47.7' AT FLOOR)

BAY

BAY

56.0" (51.4"AT FLOOR)

(AT FLOOR)

AND DOOR

CABGO INTERIOR

r60.72"-

--------rf*='=Frr
28.3'l I ll
I

L__l_L_==g,

)

BAGGAGE AND CARGO
COMPARTMENT VOLUME . CUBIC FEET
11.0
AVIONICS BAY
15.0
NOSE
10.55
wrNG LOCKER EACH (STD)
31.7
AFT CABIN (BAY A AND B)
cABrN (CARGO A,B,C,D AND E) 201.0

608520o2

608s10q2
6085100r

Figure l-2 (Sheet 2 of 2)
CABIN. BAGG:AGE AND ENTRY DIMENSIONS

1

-10

Original lssue

SECTION 1
GENERAL

MODEL 406
SPECIFIC LOADINGS
Wing Loading:

37.03 pounds per square foot.

Power Loading:

9.36 pounds per horsepower.

SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
GENERAL AIRSPEED TERMINOLOGY AND SYMBOLS
CAS

Calibrated Airspeed means indicated speed of an air-

G

Acceleration due to gravity.

GS

Ground Speed is the speed of an airplane relative to
the ground.

IAS

plane corrected for position and instrument error.
Calibrated airspeed is equal to true airspeed in standard atmosphere at sea level.

Indicated Airspeed

in the

is the speed of an airplane

as

airsDeed indicator when corrected for
instrument error. iAS values published in this Handbook assume zero instrument error.

shown

KCAS

Calibrated Airspeed expressed in knots.

KIAS

Indicated Airspeed expressed in knots.

KTAS

True Airspeed expressed in knots.

M

Mach Number is the ratio of true airspeed to the

speed of sound.

NM
TAS

Distance expressed in Nautical Miles.

True Airsneed is the airsneed of an aimlane relative
corrected for
altitude, temperatue and compressibility.

to uadisfiirbed air which' is the CAS

Takeoff Decision Speed is the speed at which an
engine failure or other cause is recognized, the distance to continue the takeoff to 50 feet or bring the
airplane to a stop will not exceed the scheduled field
length distance. The first action required to stop or
continued is assumed to have been initiated by Vr.
Takeoff Safety Speed is the speed at 50 feet above
the runway surface as demonstrated in flight during
takeoff with one enghe inoperative.
Original lssue

1-11

SECTION

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

Maneuvering Speed is the maximum speed at which
application of full available aerodynamic control will
not overctress the airplane.

V""

Critical Ensine Failure Speed is the speed at which
the ensine was failed during certification flight testins to ?etermine accelerateil stop and accelerated go
distances.

Vrn

V""

VLo

V"co

Maximum Flap Extended Speed is the highest speed
permissible with wing flaps in a prescribed extended
position.

Maximum Landins Gear Extended Speed is the
maximum speed aiwhich an airplane can be safely
flown with the landing gear extended.
Maximum Landins Gear Operating Speed is the
maximum speed ai which the landing gear can be
safely exteniied or retracted.

Air Minirnurr Control Speed is the rninirnum flight
speed at which the airplane is directionally and lateiallv controllable as determined in accordance with

Fedeial Aviation Regulations. Airplane certfication
conditions include one engine becoming- inoperative
and feathered; not more than a 5-degree bank toward
the ooerative encine; takeoff power on operative engine: ianding geir up; flaps in ta.keoff position; and
most cntlcal cent€r-ol-gTavl[y.

V,ro/M"o

Maximum Operatins Limit Speed is the speed limit
that may n;t be aeliberat€ly exceeded in normal
flight oplrations. V is expresied in knots and M in
Mach Number.

vR

Rotation Speed is the speed at which rotation is
initiated duiine taleoff to attain the V, clinb speed
at or before a Leight of 50 feet above runway surface
has been reached.

vs
Vso

1-12

Stalline Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at
which Ihe-aimlane is controllable.
Speed or the minimum steady flight speed at
Stalline
-th6
is controllable in the landing

which
airplane
confizuration.

Original lssue

SECT'ON

MODEL 406
VssB

vx

1

GENERAL

Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed is a minimum soeed. selected bv the manufacturer, for intenLionally rendering one engine inoperative, in flight,
for pilot training.

Best Anele-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed which
delivers ihe greatest gain of altitude in the short€st

possible horizontal distance.

Vts"

One Encine Inoperative Best Angle-of-Climb Speed

a-irspeed which delivers the $eatest gain of
altitude in the shortest possible horizontal distance

is the

Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain in altitude in the shortesi
possible time.

V"s.

One Ensine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed is
the airspeed which delivers the greatest gain in altitude in the shortest possible time.

METEOROLOGICAL TERMINOLOGY

'c

Temperature expressed in degrees Celsius.

"F

Temperature expressed in degrees Faluenheit'

Indicated

The number actuallv read from an altimeter when
the barometric subsiale has been set to 29.92 inches

Pressure

-

Altitude

of mercury (1013.2 millibars).

IOAT

Indicated OuLside Air Temperature is the temperature indicated on the pilot's outside air temperature
indicator. The indication is not adjusted for instrument error or temperature compressibility effects.

ISA

Int€rnational Standard Atmosphere in which:
(1) The air is a dry perfect gas;
(2) The temperature at sea level is 15 degrees

(3)
(4)
'

Celsius;

The pressure at sea level is 29.92 inches Hg.

( 1013-.2 millibars);
The rcmoerature sradient from sea level to the
altitude irt ,rhich-the temperature is -56.6 degrees Celsius. is -1.98 degrees Celsius per 1000

Ieei.

OAT

Original lssue

Outside Air Temperature is the free air static t€mDerature, obtained either from inflight t€mperature
indications or ground meteorological sources adjusted
for instrumentirror and compressibility effects.
1-13

SECTION

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

Pressure

Altitude

Station

Altitude neasured from staldard sea-level pressure
(29.92 inches Hg.) by a pressure or barometric altimeter. It is the indicated pressure altitude corrected
for position and instrument error. In this handbook,
altimeter instrument erroni are assumed to be zero.
Actual atmospheric pressure at freld elevation.

Pressure

Temperature

Compressibility
Effects

An error in the indication of temperature caused by
airflow over the temperature probe. The error varies,
depending on altitude and abspeed.

The wind velocities recorded as variables on the
charts of this handbook are to be understood as the
headvind or tailwind components of the reported

Wind

wrn0s.

POWER TERMINOLOGY
Auto Feather

A systen designed to automatically reduce drag of an
inoperative engine by moving the propeller to feather.

Critical
Altitude

The maximum altitude at which in standard temperature it is possible to maintain a specified power.

Cruising Climb
Power

The power recommended to operate the airplane in a
cmise climb (a continuous gradual clinb) profile.

ITT

Interturbine Temperature.

Flameout

Unintentional loss of combustion chamber flame during operation.

Flat Rated

Constant horsepower over a specific altitude range.

Flight Idle

The power required to run an engine, in flight, at the
lowest speed that will ensure satisfactory engine operation and airplane handling characteristics.

Power
Gas Generator

RPM

(Ns)

Ground Idle
Power

1-14

Indicates the percent of gas generator rpm based
on a figure of 100 percent at 37,500 rpm.

The power required to run an engine on the ground,
as slowly as possible, yet sufficient to ensure satisfactory engine, engine accessory, and airplane operation
with a minimum of thrust.

Original lssue

.EETL"$I

MODEL 406
Hot Start
Maximum
Continuous
Power

Maximum
Cruise Power

^

An engine start, or attempted start, which results in

ITT

exceeding 1090 degrees Celsius.

The oower developed at the maximum continuous
torqui limit, ITT jimit: or Ng limit. This is equivalent to takeoff power.

The power developed at the maximurn cruise torque
limit, ITT limit or Ng limit.

Power T\rrbine
RPM (Nf)

Indicates the percent of power turbine speed based
on a figure of 100 percent at 33,000 rpm and a
propeller speed (No) of 1900 rpm.

Propeller RPM

Indicates propeller speed in rpm.

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute.

Reverse Thrust

The thrust produced when the propeller blades
rotated past flat pitch into the Beta iange.

SHP

Shaft horsepower means the power delivered at the

Takeoff Power

The maximum power permissible for takeoff.

Torque

A measurement that
output of the engine.

Windmill

Propeller rotation from airstream inputs.

(Ne).

are

propeller shaft.

is proportional to the power

ENGINE CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS TERMINOLOGY
Beta Mode

Ensine operational mode in which propeller blade
pitih is cbntrolled by the cockpit power lever. May
be used during ground operations only.

Lever

Cockpit Control lever which sets the fuel control in
eithei "RUN" or "CUTOFF".

Gas Generator
Governor

Regulates the gas generator to the speed selected by
the cockpit power lever.

ITT

Interturbine temperature gage displaying air temperature between the cornpressor turbine and power
turbine.

Fuel Control

Gage

Original lssue

1-15

SECTION 1
GENEBAL

MODEL 406
Flyweight operated fuel met€ring device, housed in
the propeller governor. lt prevents engine overspeed
in the event of a malfunction of the propeller gov-

Overspeed

Governor

ernor.

Propeller
Governor

Regulates the RPM of the propeller by increasing or
decreasing the propeller pitch through a pitch change
mechanism in the propeller hub.

Control
Lever

Cockpit lever used to set gas generator Bpeed. During
Beta node the power lever controls propeller blade

Power

Propeller

Lever

Fropeller
Overspeed

Governor
Tachometer
Torque

Meter

angle and speed.

Cockpit lever used to set propeller RPM.

A gearbor mounted governor which dumps propeller

oil

pressure to prevent engine danage should the
propeller governor fail.

Indicates the speed

propeller (Np).

of the gas generator (Ng) or

The instrument that indicates the torque output of

tt)e englne gear Dox.

AIRPLANE PERFORMANCE AND FLIGHT PLANNING
TERMINOLOGY

Accelerate-Go The

Distance

distance required to accelerate an airplane to Vt
and assuming pilot recognizes an engine failure at Vt,

continues takeoff on the remaining engine
height of 50 feet.

to

a

Accelerate-Stop The

Distance
Aerobatic
Maneuver

distance required to accelerate an airplane to V1
and assuming pilot recognizes an engine failure at Vr,
brings the airplane to a stop.

An intentional maneuver involving an abrupt change
of an airplane's attitude, an abnornal attitude, or
abnormal acceleration, not necessary for normal
flieht.

Balked

Landing A balked

Balked

Landing The minimum

Transition
Speed

1-1 6

landing is. an aborted landing.(i.e., all en-

gines go-around in the landing configuration).

speed at which a transition to a
balked landing climb should be attempted (from
5O-foot obstacle height).

Original lssue

SECTION

MODEL 406
Climb

Gradient

1

GENERAL

The demonstrated ratio of the change in height during a portion of a climb to the horizontal distance
traversed in the same time interval.

Demonstrated The demonstrated crosswind velocity is the velocity

Crosswind
Velocity

of the crosswind component for which adequate control of the airplane iiuring takeoff and landing was
actually demonstrated during certification tests. The
value ihown is not considered to be limiting. This
value is not an aerodynamic limit for the airplane.

Maneuverins
Fuel

Maneuvering fuel is the usable fuel as shown in
Section 2 foi all airplane confrgurations, provided the
roaximum side slip duration is not exceeded.

Maximum
Effective

The maximum anount of braking pressure that can
be applied to the toe brakes without locking the

Braking

wheels.

MEA

Minimum enroute IFR altitude.

Route

A part of a route' Each end of that part is identified
Secment
bvi (1) a geographical location; or (2) a point at

wiich a d"frniie ridio frr can

be established'

WEIGHT AND BALANCE TERMINOLOGY
Arm

The horizontal distance from the reference datum to
the center-of-gravlty (C.G.) of an item.

Basic Empty

Standard empty weight plus installed optional equip-

Weight

menf,.

Center-of-Grav- The point at which an airplane would balance if
suspended. Its distance from the reference daturr is
itv
fouird by dividing the total moment by the total
weight of the airPlane

C.G. Arm

The arm obtained by adding the airplane's individual
moments and dividGg the sum by the total weight.

C.G. Limits

The ertreme center-of-sravitv locations within which
the airplane must be oplratcil at a given weight.

Jack Point

One of the three points on the airplane designed to
rest on a jack.

MAC

The Mean Aerodvnamic Chord of a wing is

Original lssue

the
chord of an imaginary airfoil which throughout the
flight range will f,ave the same force vectors as those
of the wing.
1-17

SECTION

1

MODEL 406

GENERAL

Maximum weight approved for the landing touch-

Maximum
Landing
Weight

oown.

Maximum
Ramp Weight

Maximum weieht aDDroved for sround maneuver. (It
includes weighl of siirt, taxi anil run-up fuel.)

Maximum
Takeoff Weight

Maximum weight approved for the start of the

Maximum Zero
Fuel Weight

Maximum weight exclusive of usable fuel.

Moment

The product of the weight of an item multiplied by
its arm. (Moment divided by a constant is used to
simplifu balance calculations by reducing the number
of digits.)

Payload

Weight of occupants, cargo and baggage.

Reference

An imaeinarv vertical nlane from which

Datum
Residual Fuel

takeoff run.

a.ll horizontal distinces-are measuied for balance purposes.

The undrainable fuel remaining when the airplane is
defueled in a specfic attitude by the normal means
and procedures specified for draining the tanks.

Standard
Empty Weight

Weight of a standard airplane including unusable
fuel, full operating fluide and full oil.

Station

A location along the airplane fuselage given in termg
of distance from the reference datum.

Tare

Tare is the weight of the chocks, blocks, stands, etc.
used when weighing an airplane, and is included in
the scale readings. Tare is deducted from the scale
reading to obtai; the actual (net) airplane weight.

Unusable Fuel

Fuel remainins after fuel runout tests have been
completed in iccordance with governmental regulations.

Usable Fuel

Fuel available for flight planning.

Useful Load

Difference between ramp weight and the basic empty
weight.

1-18

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

sEcTloN

2

LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS
POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
WEIGHT LIMITS .
CENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS
MANEUVER LIMITS .
FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS
FLIGHT CREW LIMITS
KINDS OF OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT LIMITS '
FUEL LIMITATIONS . .
MAXIMUM OPERATING ALTITUDE LIMIT .
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITS
MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING LIMITS .
PLACARDS

Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986

2-4

2-6
2-6
2- 10

2-tl
2-77
2-73

2-t3
2-13
2-13

2-76
2-16

2-76

2-r7
2-18

2-1 (2-2 btank)
SFAF 41

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

INTRODUCTION
Section 2 presents the operating limitations, the significance of such
limitations, instrument markings, iolor coding and basic placards necessarv for the safe operation oi ihe airplane,- its powerplants' standard
svsiems and standaid equipment. The li.rnitations included in this section and Section 9 are aiprbved by the Federal Aviation Administration.
Observance of these opeiating limitations is required by Federal Aviation
Regulations.

Oneration

in

countries other than the United States may require
or performance data in ap-

observance of other limitations, procedures
plicable supplements.
NOTE

oRefer to Sectinn I for arnended linitations for
airplanes equipped with specific optianal sys'
terns.

OThe airspeed.s listed in the Airspeed, Limitations chari (Figure 2-1) and Airspeed Indicator
Marhings charl (Fieurb 28) are'based on Airspeed, Calibration d'ata shoun in Section 5.

Original lssue

2-3

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
Airspeed limitations and their operational significance are shown in
Figure 2-1.
cAs

tAs

163

162

DO NOT MAKE ABRUPT CONTROL
MOVEMENTS ABOVE THIS SPEED.

MAXII\,!UM FLAP EXTENDED
SPEED
T.O, AND APPR POSITIONS
LAND POSITIONS
VFE (KNOTS)

200

200

r80

180

DO NOT EXCEED THIS SPEED WITH
THE GIVEN FLAP SETTING.

MAXIMUM GEAR OPERATING

180

180

OO NOT EXIENO OR RETRACT
LANDING GEAR ABOVE THIS SPEED.

180

180

DO NOT EXCEED THIS SPEED
WITH LANDING GEAR EXTENDED.

91

90

THIS IS THE MINII\4UM FLIGHT
SPEED AT WHICH THE AIRPLANE
IS CONTROLLABLE WITH ONE
ENGINE INOPERATIVE AND A
5 DEGREES BANK TOWARDS THE

MANEUVEFING SPEED
9360 POUNDS AT SEA LEVEL
IREFER TO FIGURE 2'2)
v; {KNoTS)

REMARKS

Vse (KNOTS)

MAXIi/tUM GEAR EXTENDED
VLE (KNOTS)

AIR I\.4INI[4UM CONTROL
SPEED WITH WING
FLAPS - T.O.

Vucr(KNOTS)
NOTE

OPERATIVE ENGINE.

Buffet can be encountered
os hieh as 95 KIAS uith
airplane at matimum

taieofl weight and the
wing flaps in the UP

Do$ition. FLaps UP
'taheof[
is noi approved.
DO NOT EXCEEO THIS SPEED OR
MACH NUMBER IN ANY OPERATION.

MAXIMUM OPERATING
LIMIT SPEED
VMO {KNOTS)

rlrMo (MACH NUMBER)

230
0.52

229
0.52

AS INDICATED BY BABEER POLE
IRED AND WHITE NEEDLE).
ON AIRSPEED INDICATOR,

Figure 2-1
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS

2-4

Original lssue

SECTION 2
LlirtlTATIONS

MODEL 406
CON0lTl0NSl

1. Landino qear - UP
2. Wing l6pis - UP
WEIGHT

- POUNOS

P rs
ru

o

tFf

't0

120

140
SPEED (VA)

160
- KIAS

180

EXAMPLE:

Weioht - 9000 Pounds
Altitlde - 10.000 Feet
Maximum Maneuvering Spe€d - 162 KIAS

Ficure 2-2
MAXIMUM MANEUVERING SPEEDS
Original lssue

z-a

sEcTloN 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

Airspeed indicator marking and their color significance are shown in
Figure 2-3.
IAS VALUE'
SIGNIFICANCE

MARKING

OR RANGE

RED RADIAL

90 KNOTS

AIR MINIMUM CONTROL SPEED WITH WING FLAPS IN THE
T.O. POS|T|ON.

WHITE ARC

75 TO 180

OPEBATING SPEED RANGE WITH WING FLAPS IN LAND
POSITION. LOWEB LIMIT IS MAXIMUI\,i WEIGHT STALLING
SPEED IN LANDING CONFIGURATION. UPPEF LII/IT
IS MAXIMUM SPEED PERMISSIBLE WTH FLAPS IN LAND

WIDE

NARROW

75 TO 94.5
94.5 TO 180

POStTtON.
THE TRANSITION POINT FFOM WIDE TO NARROW ARC IS
THE STALL SPEED WITH WING FLAPS IN UP POSITION.

BLUE ARC

104 TO 108
KNOTS

OPERATING SPEED RANGE WITH ONE ENGINE
INOPERATIVE EEST RATE.OF.CLIMB SPEED,
STANDARD DAY CONDITIONS AND MAXIMUM GROSS
WEIGHT. LOWER LIMIT IS SPEED AT 15,OOO FEET,
UPPER LIMIT IS SPEED AT SEA LEVEL,

RED AND WHITE
BARBER POLE

229 KNOTS
0.52 MACH

MAXIMUM OPERATING SPEED. BARBER POLE INOICATES
229 KIAS UNTIL REACHING APPROXIMATELY 22,OOO
FEET. ABOVE THIS ALTITUDE, IT WILL INDICATE
CONSTANT 0,52 MACH.

Figure 2-3.
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

POWERPLANT LIMITATIONS

Engines: 2
Engine Manufacturer: Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc.
Engine Model Number: PT6A-112
Engine Operating Limits: Refer to Figure 2-4.
Number of

Starting Cycle Limitations:
a, External Power
Or Battery Start - 30 seconds On 60 seconds Off,
- 30 seconds On 60 seconds Ofi
- 30 seconds On 30 minutes Off. Repeat the
above cvcle as required.

Minimum Engine Torque
For Takeoffi
1-O

Refer to Fizure 5-10 for minimum value for
which takeoff oerformance can be obtained.

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

ENGINE OPESATING LIMITS
GAS

iraxtmuM GENERATOR PROPELLER
POWEN
SETTING

RPM

FT.LBS

ITT'C

0)

RPM
Np

irf

otL

olL

PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
PSIG

(3)

(7)

TAKEOFF AND

MAXIMUM

1900

80

to 100

10 to 99

1900
600 {4)

80

to 100

10 to 99

101.6

1815

80 to 100

102.6

2090

1382

725

101.6

1382
't477\4)

695

'|

1382

725
825

CONTINUOUS

MAXIMUM
CLIMB/
cRUrsE (8)

01.6
1

40 MtN.

685

40 to 99
0t099

(s)
ACCELERATTON (6)

1900

0to99
40

1090 (6)

STARTING

Mlr,l.

I

Maximum permissible sustained torque is 1477 foot-pounde. Ne must be set
so as not to exceed engine operating limitations. Refer to PLACARDS this section for maximum torque table.
(2) For every 10 degrees Celsius (18 degrees Fahrenheit) below -30 degrees
Celsius (-22 degrees Fahrenheit) ambient lempemture, reduce maxbnum

(l

allowable N" by

).2

percent.

(3) Normal oil pressure is 80 to
RPM (72 percent) with oil

(4)
(5)

1 c,

100 PSIG at gas generator speeds above 27,000
temperature between 60 to 70 degrees Celsius

(140 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit). Oil pressures below 80 PSIG are undesirable and should be tolerated only for ihe completion of the flight,
preferably at reduced power setting. Oil pressures below normal should be
ieporred as an engine riiscrepancy a-nd shoutd be conected before next flight.
Oil pressures below 40 PSIG are unsafe and require that either the etrgine
be ihut down or a landing be made as soon as pbssible using the minimum
power required to sustain flight.
If maximum torque is used, \ must be set so aB not to exceed engine

operating limitations.

Reverse powe! ooeration is limit€d to one minute.
Th""" uutues are time limited to two seconds.

(?) For increased oil service life, an oil temperature between 74 to 80 degrees
Celsius (165 to 176 degrees Fahrenheit) is recommended. A minimum oil
(8)
'

temperature of 55 degrees Celsius (130 degrees Fahrenheit) is recommended
for fuel heater operation at takeoff power.
Maximum cluige power limits vary with altitude and temperature. For
maximum cruise power limits lefer 6 MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER trbleo
in Section 5.
l{OtE
100 percent Ns (2) is 37,500

RPM

Figur€ 2-4
ENGINE OPERATING LIMITS
Original lssue

2-7

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

Fuel Specification and Approved Fuel Additives:
MINIMUM FUEL
FUEL
SPECIFICATIONS

GRADE (2)

JET A
JET A.1
JET B

ASTM.D1655
ASTM-D1655
ASTM.D1655

JP.1

MtL-L-56t6

JP.4

lL-T-5624
MtL-T-5624
M tL-T-831 33A
MI1.G.5572 AND

TEMPERATURE
FOR TAKEOFF .

l?t

Jt,-5
JP-8

*AVrATroN

(3)

'c

SPECtFtC
WEIGHT POUNDS PER U.S.
600F

COLORLESS
COLORLESS
COLORLESS

-31
-31

-54
-54

-54
-31
-31

-54

COLORLESS
COLOBLESS

6.5
6.8
6.7
6.0

COLORLESS
COLORLESS
80/87 RED,
1OO GREEN,

ASTM.D91O

GASOLINE
(ALL GRADES)

COLOR

GALLON AT

(1)

l OOLL BLUE

* Aviation easoline (all srades) is approved for emergency use only. A
record of total aviation gaioline used must be recorded in the Airplane

Engine Maintenance Record.

(l)
(2)

Minimum sLarting t€mperature is thal given or the mini-mum allowable oil temperature. -40 degrees Celsius (-40

degrees Fahrenheit) whichever is warmer.

Refer to Section 8 for fuel servicing information.

.AVIATION GASOLINE IS RESTRICI| ED
TO EMERGENCY USE AND SHALL NOT BE
USED FOR MORE THAN 150 HOURS IN
ONE OVERHAUL PERIOD.

.A

MIXTURE OF ONE PART AVIATION
GASOLINE AND THREE PARTS OF JET A,
JET A-1. JP-1. or JP-\ MAY BE USED FOR
EMERGENCY PUiPOSES FON A MAXIMUM OF 450 HOURS PER OVERHAUL PERIOD.

.AUXILIARY BOOST PUMP MUST BE ON
WHEN USING AVIATION GASOLINE.

(3)
using aviation gasoline the maximum fuel and am' When
bient tempirature foi takeoff is 32 degrees Celsius (90
degrees Fahrenheit).

a. NATO equivalents of the above fuels may be used.
b. Fuel used must contain anti-icing fuel additive in

compliance

with MIL-I-276868.

2-8

Original lssue

MODEL 406

SECTION 2

LIMITATIONS

Fuel Additive:

The fuel used in the aimlane must have an anti-icine additive in
compliance with MIL-I-2?6'86E, incorporated or added into the fuel
during refueling.

JP.4 AND JP-, FUELS PER M1L.7,5624

AND JP,8 FUEL PER MIL-T-831334 CONI:AIN THE CORRECT PREMIXED qUANTITY OF AN APPROVED TYPE OF ANTIICING FUEL ADDITIVE AND NO ADDITIONAL ANTI-ICE COMPOUNDS SHOULD
BE ADDED.

Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether (EGME) compound in compliance
with MIL-I-27686E. if added. must be carefullv mired with the fuel in
the tank in concentrations not to exceed 0.ls'percent by volume. The
minimum EGME concentration within the fuel tank is 0.035 percent bv
volume.The minimum EGME concentration for fuel beine added to th-e
fuel tank is 0.060 percent by volume.

REFER TO SECTION 8 FOR PROPER
HANDLING AND SEBVICING OF
EGME.

.

MIXING OF THE EGME COMPOUND WITH
THE FUEL IS EXTREMELY IMPONTANT
BECAUSE CONCENTRATION /N
OF THAT BECOMMENDED (0.15 PERCENT
'XC'SS
BY VOLUME MAXIMUM) WILL RESULT IN
DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS TO THE FUEL
I:ANKS, SUCTI AS DETERIORATION OF
PROTECTIVE PRIMER AND SEALANTS
AND DAMAGE TO O-RINGS AND SEA'S IN
THE FUEL SYSTEM AND ENGINE COMPO.
NEN?S. USE ONLY BLENDING EqUIPMENT THAT IS RECOMMENDED BY THE
MANUFAC'| UREN TO OBTAIN PROPER
PROPORTIONING.

Original lssue

z-Y

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

Preflight Checks:

a. The overspeed governor check shall be performed: before the
fusi flisht of the dav, if there is an indication of malfunction,
after erigine control syst€m maintenance, or if adjustment has
been made.

checked before each flight and must be
operative for takeoff.
Oil Specification:
a. Refer to Section 8 for list of approved oils and specifications.
b. When addine oil, service the engines with the type and brand
which is currently being used in the engines. Do not mir tJpes
or brands of oils.
c. Tvpe II oils in compliance with Pratt and Whitney Canada Inc,

b. Autofeather shall be

Soicification PWA 521.

Canada- Inc., Service
Bulletin Numb.-er 12001 and all revisions or supplements thereto, must be used.

d. Oi conforming to Pratt and Whitney
Propellers:

a. Number of Propellers:

b.

2

Manufacturer: McCauley Accessory Division of Cessna Aircraft

Company.
Cessna Part Number: 9910535-2
d. Number of Blades: 3
Diameter: 7.?5 Feet
f. Maximum Operating Speed: 1900 RPM

Blade Angle: (At 30-Inch Station)

(1) Feathered 85.5 degrees
(2) Low Pitch 18.5 degrees
(3) Full Reverse -13.5 degrees
h Flight operation with power levers retarded below FLIGHT
IDLE are prohibited.

POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Torque Indicators:
a. 1382 Foot-Pounds Maximum Takeoff And Climb Torque
1900 RPM (Yellow Radial)
b. 0 to 1477 Foot-Pounds (Green Arc)

c. 14?? Foot-Pounds Maximum Cruise Torque

At

At

1600 RPM

(Red Radial)

ITT Indicators:
a. 725 degrees Celsius (Red Line)
b. 0 degrees to 695 degrees Celsius (Green Arc)
c. 695 degrees to 1090 degrees Celsius (Yellow Arc)
d. 1090 degrees Celsius (Red Triangle)

2-'10

Original lssue

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406
Gas Generator RPM Indicators:

a. 101.6 percent RPM (Red Line)
b. 52 percent to 101.6 percent RPM (Green

Arc)

Propeller RPM Indicators:

a.
b.

1900 RPl"{ (Red Line)
1600 to 1900 RPM (Green Arc)

Oil Pressure Indicators:
a. 40 and 100 PSI (Red Radial)
b. 40 to 80 PSI (Yellow Arc)
c. 80 to 100 PSI (Green Arc)
Oil Temperature Indicators:
a. -40 degrees and *99 degrees Celsius (Red Radial)
b. *10 degrees to i-99 degrees Celsius (Green Arc)
c. -40 degrees to + 10 degrees Celsius (Yellow Arc)

MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Instrument Air:
a. Red Line: 2.25 PSI
b. Green Lrc: 2.25 to 2.75 PSI
Oxygen Pressure:

a. Yellow Arc: 0 to 300 PSI
b. Green Arc: 1550 to 1850 PSI
c. Red Line: 2000 PSI
Propeller Deice Ammeter;
a. Individual indicators will be marked LEFT or RIGHT.
b. White arc operating range will be marked with the high end of

the scale marked with HI.
c. A normal operating green arc will be provided between the HI
and LOW ends of the white arc operating range.

^

wErcHT LrMlrs
Maximum Ramp Weight: 9435 Pounds
Maximum Takeoff Weight:
The takeoff weight is limited by the most restrictive of the follow- |
ing requirements:
a. Maximum Takeoff Weight: 9360 Pounds.
b. Maximum takeoff weight to achieve takeoff climb requirements
from Figure 5- 11.
c. Maximum takeoff weight as permitted by field length from
Fizure 5-12.

1 June 1987

2-11

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

d. Maximum takeoff weight as permitted by the

demonstrated

brake energy limits from Figure 5-13.
Maximum Landing Weight:
The landing weight is limited by the most restrictive of the follow-

ing requirements:
a. Maximum Landing Weight: 9360 Pounds.
b. Landing field length required from Figure 5-35.
lMarimum Zcro Fuel Weight with Zero Wing
I Locker Payload: 8500 Pounds
Maximurn Weights In Baggage Compartments:
(Standard and Optional Passenger Interior Confrgurations)
a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pounds each.
b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed optional equipment.
Nose Bay - 350 pounds less installed optional equipnent.
pounds (200 Pounds Per Side)' Maxid. Aft Cabin (Bay
- A) - 400
mum floor loading is 75 pounds per square
foot.
Aft Cabin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 Pounds Per Side). Maximum floor loading is 75 pounds per square
foot.
Maximum Weights in Baggage Compartments (Cargo Interior)
a. Left and Right Wing Lockers - 200 pountls each.
b. Avionics Bay - 250 pounds less installed optional equipment.
c. Nose Bay - 350 pounds Iess installed optional equipment.
d. Maximum cargo load in any 24-inch length of cabiq flo-or is 600
A, B, C, D and
oounds ner balv in the five careo bavs (Careo
-fXat
lower surface,
reasonable
has
a
smoothl
E). If the carlo
load densities -of up to 200 pounds per square foot -may be
loaded in the cargo bays. Use pallets oi beams to dbtribute the
Ioads over all seit raiis if adjicent cargo bays are loaded at a
rate of over 75 pounds per square foot.
Aft Cabin (Bay A) - 400 pounds (200 Pounds Per Side)' Marimum floor loading is ?5 pounds per square
foot.
f. Aft Cabin (Bay B) - 100 pounds (50 Pounds Per Side). Maxr
mum floor loading is ?5 pounds per square
foot.

2-12

1 June 1988

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

CENTER.OF-GRAVITY LIMITS (GEAR EXTENDED)
a. Aft Limit 180.28 inches aft of reference datum (32.00% MAC)
at 9435 pounds or less.

b. Forward Limit:172.42 inches aft of reference tlatum

(19.58%

MAC) at 9360 pounds or less and 166.99 inches
aft of reference datum (11.00% MAC) at 6500
pounds or less with straight line variation between these points.

c. Refer to Section 6 for loading schedule. The reference datum is
100 inches forward of the aft face of the fuselage bulkhead
forward of the rudder Dedals. The mean aerodttmamic chord
(MAC) is 63.245 inchei in length. The leadin! edge of the
MAC is 160.04 inches aft of the reference datun.

MANEUVER LIMITS
This is a normal category airplane. Aerobatic maneuven, including

spins, are prohibited.

FLIGHT LOAD FACTOR LIMITS
Inflight:

a. Wing Flaps - UP: -1.44 to +3.6 G at Maximum Gross Weight.
b. Wing Flaps - TAKEOFF thru LAND positions, 0.0 to *2.0 G
at Maximum Gross Weisht.

FLIGHT CREW LIMITS
Minimum flight crew is one pilot with the required equipment installed and operational.

.\

KTNDS OF OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT

LlMlrS

\rFR, and day and night
This aimlane is equipped for day VFR, night
-placard
reflects the limits
limitations
applicable at the time of Airworthiness Certilicate issuance.

IFR operaiions. Th6 irirerating

The following equipment lists identify the systems and equipment
upon which type certification for each kind of operation was predicated.
items must be installed and operable for
These system-s- and equipment
-operation

indicated unless an FAA Approv,ed
the pariicular kind 6f
Minihum Equipment Liit is in effect. The pilot is responsible for
determining fhe airworthiness of his airplane Tor each flilht and for
assuring compliance with current operating regulations. The number in

( ) indicates more than one required per airplane.
Original lssue

2-1il

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

DAY VFR:
1. Pilot Instruments
a. Airspeed Indicator (Sensitive)
*b. Altimeter Indicator
c. Magnetic Direction Indicator
2. Annunciators (Lights)
a. Oil Pressure (2)
b. Wing Overheat (2)
c. Fuel Pressuie Low (2)
d. Auxiliary Boost Pump On (2)
e. Battery Overheat
f. Hydraulic Pressure On
g. Autofeather Arm (2)
h. Air Duct Overheat
i. Landing Gear Position Indicator
j. Fuel Filter Bypass (2)
k. Inertial Seperator (2)
l. Fuel Transfer Pump (2)
3. Engine Instruments
a. Torque Indicator (2)
b. Propeller Tachometer (2)
c. ITT Indicator (2)
d. Gas Generator Tachometer (Nr) (2)
e. Oil Pressure Gage (2)
f. Oil Temperature Gage (2)
4. Miscellaneous Indicators
a. Fuel Quantity Gage (2)
b. Voltmeter
c. Ammeter {2)
d. Outside Air Temperature Gage

5.

Systerns

a. Auxiliary Boost Pump
b. Firewall Shutoff (2)
c. Generator (2)
d. Inertial Separator (2)
e. Stall Warning
f. Aileron Trim
g. Rudder Trim

*

2-14

(2)

When a servoed altimeter
altimeter is also required.

is installed a functioning

pneumatic

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

h. Elevator Trim (Manual Only)

i.

j.

Engine Ignition (2)
Engine Fire Detection (2)

k. Hydraulic Pumps(2)

l.

Flap

m. Overspeed Governor
n. Autofeather (2)

(2)

6. Miscellaneous Items
a. Seat Belts (Each Occupant)

b. Shoulder Harnesses (Front Seat(s))
c. Pilot's Operating Handbook and FAA

Approved Airplane Flight
Manual
d. Pilot's Abbreviated Checklist (Single Pilot Operation Only)
e. Headset and Boom Mountcd Microphone (Single Pilot Opera-

tion Only)

f. Exit Sign (3)
NIGHTVFR:
1. All Equipment Required for DAY VTR
2. Instrument Lights (As Required)
3. Navigation Lights (3)
4. Strobe Lights (2)
IFR:

1. All Equipment Required for DAY \rFR
2. All Equiprrent Required for NIGHT VFR (If a Night Flisht)
3. Pilot's Instruments
a. Attitude Indicator (Gyro Stabilized)

b. Directional Indicator (Gyro
c. Turn and Bank Indicator
d. Clock

Stabilized)

4. Copilot's Instruments
a. Altimeter (Sensitive)
b. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
c. Attitude Indicator (ADI)
d. Airspeed Indicator
e. Directional Gyro (DG)
5. Radios
a. Communication Iladio
b. Navigation Radio (As Required)
6. Miscellaneous Indicator
a. Instrument Air Pressure Gage.

Original lssue

2-15

sEcroN

2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

FUEL LIMITATIONS (Refet to Figure 2'5)
Maneuvering Fuel:
fuel starvation, maximu4 side -slip duration
a.
- Due to possible
iime is one minute when the L or R XFER PUMP FAIL light
is illuminated. The airplane is considered in a side slip any
time the turn and banh'ball" is more than one-half ball out of
the center (coordinated flight) position. Unusable- fuel quantity
increases when more severe side slip is maintained'

FUEL TABLE
TOTAL FUEL CAPACITY

USASTT FUEL

(u.s. GALLONS)

(u.s. GALLOT{S)

481.5

475.0

Figure 2-6
Fuel Balance;
a. Maximurn fuel imbalance is 300 pounds.
Unusable Fuel:
a. Unusable fuel is 3.25 gallons per side.

MAXIMUM OPERATING ALTITUDE LIMIT
Maxirnum Operating Altitude is 30,000 Feet.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Cold Day:
from Sea Level to
-54 degrees Celsius C65 degrees
a.
-lined Fahreaheit)
- 25,300"feet,
de4:ees
at
to 30,000-feet
then straight
--6-3Ceisius (-8i degrees Fairenheit) Refer to S,e-ction 5, ISA Conversion and Operating Temperatwe Limits Charts.

Hot Day:

u.
b.
c.

2-16

+Sa.O degtees Celsius (*12? degrees Fahrenheit) for ground
operations t0 5000 feet.
ISA +3?.0 degrees Celsius (i99 degreee Fahrenheit) for all
ground operations from 5000 feet to 14,000 feet.
is.q +gz.o degrees Celsius (*99 degreqs Fahrenheit) for all
flight operations from sea level to 30,000 feet.

Original lssue

MODEL 406

sEcTtoN

2

LIMITATIONS

MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING LIMITS
The two forward seats are pilot seats.
12 passenger seats may be installed aft of the pilot
to Section 6 for seat locations.

A maximum of
seats. Refer

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LTMITATIONS

PLACARDS
On Instrument Panel.

PARKING BRAKE
PULL TO SET

"l-\
--TOn Left Side Panel

PARI(ING BRAI(E
DEPRESS RUDDER PEDALS. UNLt)CK
T-HANOLE, PULL OUT AND RETOCK'
UNLOCK T.HANDLE. PUSH IN AND,.
RELTASE.
-_- -NELOCT.

Tt) APPIY.
T()
.-

OO N(]T OEPRESS RUI)OER PEDALS.

On Instrument Panel Near Landing Gear Selector Switches:
OPE R AND EXTD
SPEEO I8 t) KIAS

MAX
HORN

UP

GEAR

--JI

V
DISABLE

DN

G

EAR

On Landing Gear Indicator Lights:

00116001

2-18

Original lssue

sEcTtoN 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

On Emergency Gear Control Cover.
EMER GEAR
EXTEND

r

6tAi strtcr

?
3

GTAS SYS C/B
PLJII
T HAN!TT

Adjacent to Wing Flap Position Control.

FLAPS

200 (TS

200KTS

APPB L
18

O

KTS

LAND

r80

Airplanes -0001 thru -0010
On Environmental Control Panel.

o,li;.N

NF^,rf,

/'"\
t1

CABIN LIEAT
WAqVt

---lili;

q

,\l
,r/

coorrR
CABIN AIR

c0c(Ptr

PULL

+
PIJLL

r,,,r,

80lH

n'o *

|
oir

PUSH

-f

orr

L

RAM Ar8

+
CAB]N

KTS

Airplanes -0011 and On

/
I4ANUAL
Iorrhost

I

FF

tSH

AIN

PULL

00116001

1 June 1987

2-19

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

On Left and Right Emergency Exit Window Trim.

On Right Wall Forward of Emergency Exit and On Left Ernergency Exit
Window Trim.

AFT FACING SEAT BACK MUST 8E
ERECT FOR TAKEOFF

&

LANOING

On Emergency Exits.

Internal:

ll

atr\

OPTN

J/

ct-osE

EXIT

Left Exit

Right Exit

Near Cabin Door
Exterior:
CLOSE

t
I
I
I

I

OPEN

2-20

TO OPEN

DOOR

ROTATE HAN DI-E OOWN
DTPT()Y U PPIR OOOR
RO]A] E SIII- TEVER LJP
STANo Cl-tAR Ar'10 oEPLoY L0WER 000R

TO CLOSE

OOOR

sT0w i0wER 000R
R0TATE S -r r-tvtR 00wN T0 r0cK
STOW

UPP

ER

DOO R

ROTATE HANOI-T UP
STOW HANOI.E

TO

TOCK

00116001

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

Near Cabin Door.
Internal;

EXIT

^Mffi
Near Cargo Door.

Erterior:

Near Left and Right Emergency Exits.
Exterior:

OP€N

t
I
I

I

ctosE

Near Crew Door.

Erterior:

I
LOCK

I
I

OPTN/

I
00t 16001

Original lssue

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

Near Crew Door.
Internal:

-!\

r'lI

cl,osEo

Near Cargo Door.
Internal;

DO()R
()PERATION

T0

0PEN'

SLIDE BUTTON

FWo+&
}
'
TO CL(]SE'

ROTATE

HANDLE

fiRlilE

)
00116001

2-22

Original lssue

SECTION 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

On Horizontal Part of Lower Baggage Shelf.

On Horizontal Part of Upper Baggage Shelf.

-r

On Cover of Extemal Power Recentacle.

EXTERNAI POWER

28 VoLTS 0.C.

N0MTNAL

8()() AMP
STARTING CAPACITY MIN.

O() N()T EXCEEO IT(]O AMPS

(rc11600r

Original lssue

2-23

SECTION 2
LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

On Control Pedestal.

l0

oFF A

A

LlI.rf f-Lle

0PtN

+
r,?;"r / \ --"U3sl
riftir-l
li;i/i f---

l,0cx

FUtr c6ossttto

T! 0Pll{

+
t0cK

---J

-tOn Pilot's Sunvisor (Forward Side).

On Pilot's Sunvisor (Aft Side).
(]PERATI(]NAL LIMITS
TI']I {A8KII\IGS AI\ID PLACAROS INSTALLED IN THIS AIRPIAIIIE COiITAIN
opiiririre rruiilttotts wttcH MUST sE coMPtlto wllli '/Ytlt
ainpLltt ttt Tflt i/oRMAL cATtcoRY olhtq oftn rNG
obiirlititic
THIS
iirv:iiaTions vi{ici Musr Bt coMPtrto wtrt wxttl 0PtnATlN6
'ptror s
iiii-ribnl,t-rL crtlconv rru cottrt*tt0 tr
"
r,uluat
tLtcttt
rppnovto
fiiiniiiie i*liitsb'ox ar,to
iriis- inpiaii ri lprnovtD fon oay ilrcHr vfn coNolTlolls lT Is
npgnowo ron olr.ucur ttn c0it0ln0 s allo tllctlls lNT0 lclN8
hirir'orrrolrs it
rnoptn tourPMtttl rs tttsTAtlE0 ANo oPERATlot'lat

iili
ii#iniiiii

lnnmt

tu

-

ut

irt

NO ACBOEATIC MAITTUVERS, INCLUOING SPII'IS, APPROVEI]

..--'--- 30'000 FttT
' ....-.-.-....90 l(lAs
-.-.' r80
..-KlAs
iiiiiiiiriu einCoprmrm sptE0-,,,, --......'-'
" ]80 xlas
i,rliiMuu eiln urtmto srElo- --.-.-'
-...''200
KlAs
APPR
unxim'u iLlp urtmro spE$ r 0 &
..- - ' -- 180 KAs
ir,ialiir'iur,,t rinp ixrtmto sPttD LArto'
..--'
162 KIAS
ulltuvtntle srtto - "" .----'.-' -

Alrlruot counor Sptt0.,-,

MAXIMUM 0PtnAllN6

riCriiilrLiiuri,r

Near Propeller Synchrophaser Control'
PROP

SYNC/PHASE

/'*0"

l+l

\

P+', **{,
00116001

2-24

Original lssue

sEcroN

MODEL 406

2

LIMITATIONS

To Right of Pilot's Altimeter.

Near Propeller Control Levers.
I]O NOT
REVERSE WITH
PRO

PS

D() NOT ATTEMPT
REVERSE WITH
PRt)PTLLERS FEATHERED

FEATH EREt)

Airyrlanes -000t thru -0010
Aileron Trim Indicator.

L

II
Rudder

Airplanes -0011 and On

ROLL

R

I

Trim Indicator.

lllevator Trim Indicator.

I

0

[iH
r|r|
Inside Left, Nose Baggage Door on Hydraulic Reservoir.

-

MAX FULL

ADD00116001

'1

June

.1987

2-25

sEcroN

2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

On Inner Side of Oil Filler Door:

ENGINE OIL
CAPACITY

9.2 US

OUARTS

SEE PITOTS OPERATING HANOBOOK FOR
APPROVTO OItS. ENTER OIT BRAND ANO

TYPt lN ENGINE t0G

800K.

5eoorsr ?s

On Inside of Nacelle Baggage Door (Left and Right)

MAX
BAGGAGE
2O(] LBS
Near Main Tank Filler CaP.

6ue!
lEr:-a
t37.s
ol1
Us

us€Aatl

tHi,,'j'':t#ffi
On Executive Top and Writing Desk Top.

TABLE MUST BE STOWED DURING
TAKE-OFF AND LANDING
On Stowage Drawer

DURING TAKEOFF & LANDING
DRAWER MUST BE IN STOWED
POSITION
00116001

l-zo

Original lssue

sEcTtoN 2

MODEL 406

LIMITATIONS

Inside Nose Baggage Doors.

Inside l,eft Nose Baggage Door.

EXTERNAL HYD.
RESERVOIR FILL

MtL-H-5606

-

Inside Avionics BaY Door.

ilr-Axriluil BAGGAGII-,
250 LBS
trAx

cAPACITY

OPIIONAL

LESS

EQUIP,

mrr00oi

Original lssue

SECTION 2

LIMITATIONS

MODEL 406

On Left Side Tailcone Forward of Rudder Hinge Line.

UNTOCK

UNL()CI(
BEF()RE TAXI

&

\o

FLIGHT

to cx

On Instrument Panel Near Oxygen Control (If Installed).

USE BLUE

OXYGEN

CONNECTOR ()NLY
0
X
Y
G

P
U

L
I

E

N

00116001

2-28

Original lssue

MODEL

406

EMERGENcY

t*3"t8JLTtS

sEcfloN

3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEEDS FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS .

...

.t-o
3-5

.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST

Emergencies .....:.

.t-t)

FAILURE

Engine Failure
-ENGINE

Before V, (Speed Below 98 KIAS)
Engine Failure After Vr (Speed Above 98 KIAS) .
Decision to Abort Takeoff
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Below Vr,ace) . .
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Above Vr"rca) . .

Both Engines Fail in Flight
Engine Securing Procedure
AIRSTART
Starter Assist
No Starter Assist . .
SMOKE AND FIRE
Engine Fire During Ground Operations (Sufficient Runway
Remaining to Stop) . .
Cabin Fire During Ground Operations
Inflight Wing or Engine Fire . . .
Inflight Cabin Electrical Fire or Smoke

rt-O

3-7

3-8

3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10

3-10
3-10
3-10
3- 11

3-11

Smoke Removal

3-L2

EMERGENCY DESCENT
Preferred Procedure
In Turbulent Atmospheric Conditions

GLIDE

.J_O

3-12

.

LANDING EMERGENCIES
Precautionary or Forced Landing With Power Landing Without Power . .

Landing With Flat Main Gear Tire
Landing With Flat Nose Gear Tire
Landing With Defective Main Gear

Original lssue

-

1 July 1986

3-L2
.

3-r2
3-13
3-13

3-14

3-1

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

MODEL 406

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page

.......3-15
Landing With Defective Nose Gear
...... 3-15
Landing With Power, Landing Gear Retracted
....'.3-15
Landing With Wing Flaps Retracted
.....3-16
Engine Inoperative Landing
Engine Inoperative Go-Around (Speed Above 101 KIAS) . . . . . 3-16

.....3-16
.......3-17
........ 3-17
......3-17
....... .. 3-18
....'.3-20
'..3-21
.......3-22
Oxygen System Failure..
. . .. 3-22
Ice Protection Systems Emergencies ....
.........3-23
Avionics Bus Failure .
.'..3-23
Exits
..
Emergency
.. 3-24
.
......
Procedures
Rescue
LocatorTransmitter
Emergency
(Warning
Flag
Showing)
Failure
Encoding Altimeter
'...... ' 3-24
.. 3-24
.....
Emergency
Situations
Procedures
For
Transponder
.....3-25
...
of
Communications
Total Loss
.''......3-25
Electric Elevator Trim Runaway
.......3-26
.
SPINS
Ditching

SYSTEM EMERGENCIES
Propeller Synchrophaser Failure .
Fuel System Emergency Procedures
Electrical System Emergency Procedures
Hydraulic Systems Emergencies ...
Environmental Systems Emergencies . .

AMPLIFIED EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
AIRSPEEDS FOREMERGENCY OPERATIONS .... .. . ., ., 3-27
3-27
Maneuvering Speed (Ve)
. ...3-27
Maximum Gliding Distance Speed ..
..'..3-28
Air Minimum Control Speed (Vvco) .
One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed (Vysc) . . . . . 3-28
....' 3-28
Takeoff Decision Speed (Vr)
......3-28
Takeoff Safety Speed (Vr)

3-2

1 June 1987

MODEL 406

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page

Emergencies
ENGINE FAILURE

3-29
3-29
3-29

Engine Failure Before V, (Speed Below 98 KIAS)
Engine Failure After V1 (Speed Above 98 KIAS) .
Decision to Abort Takeoff
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Below Vr,rce) . .
Engine Failure in Flight (Speed Above V"co) . .

3-30
3-30
3-32
3-33

Both Engines Fail In Flight

3-34

Engine Securing Procedure

3-35

--\AIRSTART
Starter Assist (Preferred Procedure)
No Starter Assist . .
SMOKE AND FIRE
Engine Fire During Ground Operations (Sufficient Runway
Remaining To Stop)
Cabin Fire During Ground Operations
Inflight Wing or Engine Fire . . ,
Inflight Cabin Electrical Fire or Smoke

3-35
3-36
3-38

3-38
3-38

3-38
3-39
3-40

Smoke Removal

Supplementary Information Concerning Airplane Fires
EMERGENCY DESCENT
Preferred Procedure
In T\rrbulent Atmospheric Conditions

GLIDE

3-40
3-41
3-41

3-41
3-42

.

LANDING EMERGENCIES
Precautionary or Forced Landing With Power .
Landing Without Power . .
Landing With Flat Main Gear Tire

-\

Landing With Flat Nose Gear Tire
Landing With Defective Main Gear
Landing With Defective Nose Gear
Landing With Power, Landing Gear Retracted
Landing With Wing Flaps Retracted
Engine Inoperalive Landing
Engine Inoperative Go-Around (Speed Above 101 KIAS) . . . .
Ditchins

1 June 1987

3-43
3-43
3-43

.

3-44
3-45

3-45
3-46

siel
3-47
.

3-48
3-49

3-3

sEcTloN 3

MODEL 406

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page

SYSTEM EMERGENCIES
Engine Emergency Procedures
Propeller Syrrchrophaser Failure . .
Fuel System EmergencY Procedures
Electrical System Emergency Procedures
Hydraulic SystemEmergencies ....
Environmental System Emergencres
Oxygen Systen Failure ....
lce Protection Emergencies . .' . . .
Avionics Bus Failure
Emergency Exits . .
Cabi;Do;r, Crew Door or Emergency Exit Not Secured Light
Illuminated (Door Not Locked) .
Nose Baggage Door OPen on Takeoff
Emergency Locator Transnitter Rescue Procedures
Encoding Altimeter Failure (Warning Flag Showing)
Transponder Procedures For Emergency Situations
Total Loss of Communications ......
Electric Elevator Trim RunawaY . .

SPINS

.

rMencnNcv INF0RMATI0N

3-4

'

"""'

3-49
3-49
3-49

3-49
3-52
3-54
3-57

3-58
3-59
3-61
3-61

.t-ol
3-62
3-62

3-62
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-64

3-65 (3-66 blank)

Original lssue - 1 JulY 1986

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION

Section 3 describes the recommended procedures for emergency situations. The first part of this section provides emergency procedural
action required in an abbreviated checklist form. Amplification of the
abbreviated checklist is presented in the second part of this section.
I{OTE

Refer to Section 9 for amended operating limita-

tions, operating proced,ures, performance data

and. other necessary information
equipped with specific options.

^AIRSPEEDS

for

airpLanes

FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONS

Conditions:
1. Takeoff Weight - 9360 Pounds.
2. Landing Weight - 9360 Pounds.
3. Standard Day, Sea Level.
4. Wing Flaps - T.O. Position Unless Otherwise Noted.
5- Landins Gesr - UP.
(1) Maneuvering Speed With Wing Flaps UP (VA) . . . . . . 162 KIAS
(2) Maxinum Gliding Distance Speed With Wing
Flaps Up
. . 125 KIAS
(3) Air Minimum Control Speed (Vr,nce) .
......90KIAS
(4) One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed

With Wing Flaps UP (VysJ At

Sea

Level

108

KIAS

(5) One Engine Inoperative Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
With Wing Flaps UP (VysE) At 15,000 Feet . . . . . . 104 KIAS
(6) Takeoff Decision Speed With Landing Gear Down (Vr) 98 KIAS
(7) Takeoff Safety Speed (VJ
102 KIAS

Original lssue

3-5

SECTION 3
EMERGENCY PBOCEDURES

{ABBREVIATEDPBOCEDURES)

MODEL 406

EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED
CHECKLIST
I{OTE

This Abbreuiated Emergency Procedures Chec'
hlist ts included as a suppkment to the AmProcedures CheckList. The
Emerpencv
nlified
'Alibreuiated
-Emi
rgency Procedures Chechlist

should not be used until the flight crew has
become familiar with the airplane and systerns.
AII Amplified Emergency procedure item.s must
be accimitish.ed reg-ardlbsi of which ch.ecklist is
used.

Procedures in the Abbreviated Checklist portion of this section shown
in bold face type are inmediate-action items and should be comnitted

to memory.

EMERGENCIES

Engine Failure
ENGINE FAILURE BEFORE V1 (Speed Below 98 KIAS)

l

Power Levers - GROUND IDLE.

2. Brakes and Noe€wheel Steering - AS REQUIRED.
If

Airplane Cannot be Stopped in Remaining Runway:

3. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF,
4. Battery and Generators - OFF.

ENGINE FAILURE AFTER Vl (Speed Above 98 KIAS)

1. Aileron end Rudder - AS REQUIRED to rraintain straight
ahead flight (3 to 4 degrees bank
with l/2 ball slip into operative engine).

2. Power - MONITOR.
3. Landing Gear - UP when rate-of-climb is positive.
4. Propeller - VERIFY feathered'
5. Airspeed - MAINTAIN Vz to 4OO feet minimum, then increase to fO8 KIAS.
6. Wing Flaps - UP.
?. Trim Tabs - ADJUST.

J-O

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(neenevtnrEDpRocEDUREs) EMERGENcYt"o%t8JlT.3

After Reaching 1000 Feet Above Ground Level:
8. Inoperative Engine - SECURE.
DECISION TO ABORT TAKEOFF

1. Landing Gear - CIIDCK DOWN. Gear



3
2
WHEN EX

Ficure 3-2
EMERGANCY EXITS

Original lssue

3-65 (3-66 blank)

sEcIoN 4
\IORMAL PROCEDURES

MODEL 406

sEcTloN

4
NORMAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
AIRSPEEDS FOR

NORMALOPERATIONS .....,..

Page
4-3

4.3

NORMAL PROCEDURES ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
BEFORE TAXIING

4-4
4-7

4-8
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-9
4-10

.

TAXIING ..

BEFORE TAKEOFF

TAKEOFF
CLIMB .

...

4-10

CRUISE.....
DESCENT
BEFORE LANDING
BALKED LANDING
AFTER LANDING ...,.....
SHUTDOWN ...
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMIT"TER

.
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
Oxygen System
Heaiing and Ventilating Systens '
CHECK

4-11
4-11
4-11

4-72

4-t2

...4-rz
...4.72

'.....'

4-12

. . . .4-13 (4-14 blank)

AMPLIFIED NORMAL PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
ENGINE CLEARING PROCEDURES
ENGINE IGNITION PROCEDURES
BEFORE TAXIING
TAXIING
BEFORE TAKEOFF
original lssue -

l

July 1986

4-77

4-19
.

4-20
4-22
4-24
4-25
4-1

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

MODEL 406

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTTNUED)
Page

TAKEOFF

CLIMB

4-28
4-30

.

CRUISE

DESCENT
BEFORE LANDING
BALKED LANDING

4-31

AT"IERLANDING..,..

4-35
4-35

4-32
4-34

SHUTDOWN
POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER

CHECK

4-36
4-36
4-36

.

ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
Oxygen System
Heating and Ventilating Systems

4-37
4-37
4-37
4-37

.

OTHER NORMAL PROCEDURES .. . . . .
Fire Detection and Extinguishing System
Stall . . .
Maneuvering Flight . .
Night Flying
Cold Weather Operation
AVIONICS SYSTEMS NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOISE ABATEMENT ..
PROCEDURES FOR PRACTICE DEMONSTRATION OF
Practice Demonstration of Vysa
Simulated Engine Failure in Takeoff Configuration . .
FUEL CONSERVATION .

4-38
4-38

4-38
4-40

4-48
VMCA

4-49
4-45

4-50
4-50

Original lssue - 1 July 1986

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

MODEL 406
INTRODUCTION

Section 4 describes the recommended procedures for normal operations. fne first part of this section provides nornal procedural action
;;;i;"d il checkiist form. Amplification of the abbreviated checklist is
presented in the second part of this section.
I{OTE

Reler to Section 9 for amended operating Limitations, operqting procedures, performance .data

and olher necessary informatrcn lor alrplanes
equipped with sPecific oPtions.

^

AIRSPEEDS FoR NoRMAL oPERATIoNS
Conditions:
l. Takeoff Weight - 9360 Pounds
2. Landins Weisht - 9360 Pounds
3. Sea Leiel, Standard DaY
(1) Air Minimum Control Speed With Wing Flaps

.....'90KIAS
In T.O. Position (Vuce) .
(2) Rotation Speed With Wing Flaps In T.O' Position (VR) 98 KIAS
(3) AII Engines Best Angle-of-Climb With Wing Flaps
.'...102KIAS
In T.O. Position (Vx) ...
(4) All Engines Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
. ' 109 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In T.O. Position (Vv)
(5) All Engines Best Rate-of-Climb Speed
. . . 112 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In UP Position (Vv)
(6) Maximum Operating Speed (V"6/M"s ) . . 229 KIAS/0'52 Mach
162 KIAS
(?) Maneuvering Speed (Ve)
(8) All Engines Landing Approach Speed
. ' ' 101 KIAS
With Wing Flaps In LAND Position .
(9) Speed For Transition To Balked Landing Conditions 101 KIAS
(10) Maximum Demonstrated Crosswind Velocif . '.... 20 KNOTS
(11) Takeoff Decision Speed With Landing Gear Down (Vr) 98 KIAS
'..102KIAS
itz) Takeoff Safety Speed (V,) ...
itei Intentional One Engine Inoperative Speed (VssB) . . ' ' 98 KIAS

Original lssue

4-3

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

MODEL 406

NOTE

OVisually check inspection pLates and generaL
oirDlonp condilion durine uolh aroL"nd inspiction. lf night t'light is planncd. chech op
erction ol oll liehts and mah" surp a flnsh-

light ia aoailabLe.

aE&sute oirpLone has been
seruiced uith the proper grade
dnd type of ftEL
ORefer to Sectinn 8 for quatu
tities, materinls and. specilha
tions of frequedtly used. sernice
items.

'I

a.

Pitot Tube Cover(s) - REMOVE.

b. Control l,ocks - REMOVE and stow
c.

Parkins Brake - SET.

d. AII Switches - OFF.

All Circuit Breakers - IN.
l. Spare Fuses - ENSURE availabilitv
rg, Oxygen - ON; Quantity, Masks and Hoses (blue conneclor)
e.

-

CHECK; Orygen - OFF.
h. Landine Gear Switch - DOWN.
i. Trim T;b Controls (3) - SET for takeofi
j. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
k. Flap Position kver and Indicator - CHECK in same position.
l. Battery S$'itch - ON.
m. Fuel Gages - CHECK quantity and opention.
Fuel Totalizer - SET.
o. Anti-Collision Lieht', - CHECK oDeration then OFF.
p.
LishG (3) - CHECK o-peration then OFF.
'q. Navigation
Landlng LigbG (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
r. Taxi Light - CHECK operation then OFF.
* s. Suface Deice Lights (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
* t. Wing Recognition Lights (2) - CHECK operation then OFF.
'r u. Oscillating Beacon Ground Recognition Lights (2) - CHECK operation
then OFF.
'r v. Electric Windshield - CHECK operation by observing discharge on
battery ammeter if inflight use is anticipated. Ensure system is turned
off after ooerational check.
w. Pitot, Stall and Vent Heat Switch(es) - ON 20 seconds then OFF.
x. Battery Switch - OFF.
v. Cabin Fire Extinzuisher - CHECK Becuritv and pressure.
z- Win&hields and Windows - CHECK for cracks and eeneral condrtion.

2a.

Wing Locker Baggage Door - SECURE and LOCKED.
b. Wing Flap - CHECK secwity and attachment.
c. Control Surface Lock - REMOVE, if installed.
d. Aileron and

position.

Tab - CHECK condition. fieedom of movement and tab

Denotes items to be checked
installed on your airplane.

if

the applicable optional equipment is

Figure 4-1 (Sheet f of 3)
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

4-4

Original lssue

SECTION 4

MODEL 406
e,

NORI/IAL PROCEOURES

Trailing Edge Static Dischalge Wicks - CHECK condition and attach-

menl,
t. Stall Warning Vane - CHECK freedom of movement and warm.
Fuel Tank Fuel Quantity - CHECK; Cap - SECURE.
h. Fuel Tank Vent and Overboard Drain Line - CLEAR.
i. Bottom Outboard Wine - CHECK for fuel leaks or stains.
Outboard Deice Boot - CHECK condition and securitv.

3a.

Wing Tie Down - REMOVE.

b. Fuel Tank Sumps (2) - DRAIN; CHECK for water and contsmination.
c. Engirie _Compartment General Condition - CHECK for fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid and exhaust leake or starns.
d. Exhaust Stubs - EXAMINE stubs and scuppers for cracks or missing

material.

e.

Oil Cooler Inlet - CLEAR.
Oil Lcvel - CHECK: Cap-Secure.

Propeller and Spinner -EXAMINE for nicks, security and oil leals.

h. Intake Air Openine - CLEAR.
J.

tnboard Deic-e Booi - CHECK condir,ion and securitv.
Main Gear, Strut, Door, Tire and Wheelwell - CHECK

Engine Fire Ertinguisher Bottle Pressure - CHECK

t€mperature/charge Dressure on sage.
l. Crossfeed Line and ifuel Filte! Driin - DRAINT CHECK for water and

contamination.

m. Hydraulic Fluid Relief Overboard Line - CLEAR.

n. Lower luselage, Nose and Cent€r Section - CHECK for fuel, oil and
hydraulic lea-ksor stains and antenna security.
o. Wing Leading Edge Vent Inlet and Outlet - CHECK clear of obstructrons.

4a.

Crew Door - UNLOCK door handle with kev.
b. Hydraulic Fluid Regervoir Level - CHECK.
c.

Emergency Landing Gear Blow Down Bottle Pressure - CHECK in
Lhe green arc. Check ihat red ring is not showing on the control rod. If
red ring is visible. refer to the Airplane Maintenance Manual before

flight.

- SECURE and LOCKED (with key).
Avionics Bay Door - SECURE and LOCKED (with kei).
Nose Gear, Strut, Stop Block. Door. Tire, Wheel Well - CHECK.
Tie Down - REMOVEPitot T\rbe - CLEAR and WARM.
Ram Air Inlet - CLEAR.
Pitot Tube - CTEAR and WARM.
Oxygen Overboard Discharge Indicator - CHECK ereen diec installed.
Alcohol Reservoir - CHECK for quantity, dipstickln and cap closed.
Battcry - CHECK.
Baggage Door - SECURE and LOCKED (with key).

d. Nose Baggage Door
e.

I.
i.

j.

*k.

*t.

m.
n.

5a.

Wing Leading Edge Vent Inlet and Outlet - CHECK clear of obstruc-

llons.

b. Overboard Drain Lines (2) - CLEAR.

Denotes iteds to be checked
installed on your airplane.

if

the applicable optional equipment is

Figure 4-l (Sheet 2 of 3)
PREFLIGIIT INSPECTION

Original lssue

4-5

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

MODEL 406

Fuselage, Nose and Center Section - CHECK for fuel oil' and
hvdraulic fluid leaks or stains and anmnna secunty ^-for water and
Fitt"" oi"in - DRAIN; CHEcK
contamination
qld-contamination'
i'u.iT""[ So-p (2) - DRAIN; CHECK fo: water
i\4"* G;;", Si*r, ooor, Tire and Wheel Welt ' CHECK'

c. Irwer
d.

".
i.

d';;6; ii;;;"d-ru'i

Bottle
;. 6;;i;;'h;;;-n-Jiieui"h".
pressure on gage.

h.

i.
-i.

, k.
t;.
;:

Preseure

-

CHECK

lemperature/charge
Oil Cooler Inlet - CLEAR.
Oil Level - CHECK; CaP'Secure.

Exhaust Stubs - EXAMINE stubs and scuppers tbr cracks or mrssrng
material.
i=Jiard Deice Boot - CHECK condition and security'
lntake Air OPenine' CLEAR.
leaks'
securitv
ijffi;ll;;;,;i5pi-n'n""-' ExetnltNe for nicks'
"and"oil
oil' hv'
tuel'
for
cHEcK
Ger'".u1--Co"dition
b;".i;;'b;;;;ir-ent
dra:ulic fluid and exhaust leaks

o. Wing Tie Down - REMOVE.

Deice Boot - CHECK condition and security-'
-,r a- Outboard
b. E;ft; dtb.ard Wing - CHECK for tuel leaks or stailrs'
Line --C-LEA8'
i. Fu"t 'fu"t Vent and O-verboard DrainCap
- SECURE
CHECK;
FueL
;. b;;i
i;"i
Quantitv
l. 'giiL.-il"iu*td wine"' CHECK for tuel leaks or gtains'
i. C"irii"l Surface Lock -- REMOVE' if installed'
e. Aileron ' CHECK condition and freedom of movemem'.
fi: t;;ti';; E;;;S;ii" ois"trarge Wiits - cHEcK condition and attachment.
ftup - CHECK securitv and attachment. ----i.
j. Wl"e
wiiiE h&"" S"sg"ge Door -- SECURE and LOCKED'
.

a. Static Ports - CLEAR. Do not blow into static ports'
6. luii"on" Drain Holes - CHECK clear of obstructions' and securitv'
- i. rli"*j"Lt Si"Uitiiei O"ice Boot - CHECK condition
i. to.iiot Surface t ock(s) - R"EMOVE' if- installed-'
;: il;iH; trd;;5tiii"'iii""t'-.rg"-wi"t" CHECK condition and attachment.

and Tab - CHECK condition, freedom of movement and tab

f. ii6;;""
Dosition.

s. hudder
f;. ffiffi

Custlock - RELEASED.
"c-Hetii

iii"ii-l

-

condition, freedom of movement and tab

{rlliT""J st"uili*. oeice Boot - CHECK condition and securitv'
j. Tie Down - REMOVE.
aecunty'
k. gieuato" und Tub - CHECK condition, freedom of movement
securitv'
and
condition
cHEcK
Boot
ljeice
r, l. il."i?ir,it"i'Suuitrzei
m. static Pods - CLEAR. Do not blow into static ports'
Cargo Door-and Hinges ' CHECK condition and secunry'
Uoder and fower Cargo Door Lakhes - ENGAGED'
p. ci6in iloo. - CHECK security and conditjon'

*

Denotes items to be checked
installed on your
- airplane.

if

the applicable optional equipment is

Fieuie 4-1 (Sheet 3 of 3)
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION

4-6

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(reenevrerED

'RocEDURES)

*o*ro. r*otS3JLHS

NORMAL PROCEDURES
ABBREVIATED CHECKLIST
I{OTE

This Abbreuiated Normal Procedures Chechlist
includ.ed. as a supplement to the AmpLified.
Normal Proced.ures. Use of the Abbreuiated
NormaL Proced,ures Chechlist should not be used
until the flight creu has become familiar with
lhe airplane and. systems. ALI amptified normaL
procedire items rnust be accomplished regarrlless of uhich chechlist is used.

is

BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
1. Preflight - COMPLETE.
2. Crew Door - LATCHED and SECURE.
3. Cabin Door(s) - LATCHED and SECURE.
4. Baggage - SECURE.
5. Parking Brake - SET.
6. Control Locks - REMOVE.
7. Seat, Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - ADJUST and SECURE.
8. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
9. Cabin Heat Source Selector - OFF.

-

10. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
11. All Switches and Circuit Breakers - OFF and Set.
12. Generator Switches - CHECK OFF.
13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. Interior and Exterior Lights - AS REQUIRED.
15. Passenger Advisory Lights - ON.
16. Landing Gear Switch - DOWN; Check Green Lights - ON.
17. Annunciaior Panel, Waming Lights
and Warnine Horns - PRES'S-T:O-TEST.
18. Firewall Shutoff Switches - CYCLE, lights check.
19. Fuel Quantity - CHECK.
20. Fuel Totalizer - SET (if installed).
21. Air Conditioner - OFF.
22. Powet Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
23. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
24. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF.

Original lssue

SECTION 4

NORMAL

PROCEDURES

(ABBREVIATED PROCEDURES)

MODEL 406

ENGINE STARTING (Battery Start)
1. Voltmeter - CHECK (24 volts minimum).
2. Propellers - CLEAR.
3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check Auxiliary boost pump annunciator light-ON, fuel pressure low
light-OFF.
START.
4. Start Switch
5. Ignition Lighi - CHECK ON.
6. Fuel Control Lever - RUN Above 12 percent N..
?. IT"T and Ng - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius Maximun).
8. Start Light - OFF Above 42 percent N, .
9. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or Above).
10. Engine Instruments - CHECK,
11. Power Lever - INCREASE to 68 percent N, .
12, Generator Switch - ON.
13. After generator output decreases below 200 Anperes repeat steps
through 10, and 12 on opposite engine.
14. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.

2

ENGINE STARTING (With Extemal Power)
1. Battery and Generator Switches - OFF.
2. External Power Unit - ENGAGE; then ON.
3. Propellers - CLEAR.
4. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annunciator lieht on, FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciator light - OFF.
Switch
START.
5. Start
6. Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
?. Fuel Control Lever - RUN Above 12 percent Ng .
8. ITT and N8 - MONITOR (1090 degees Celsius Maximum).
9. Start Light - OFF Above 42 percent Nr.
10. Start Switrh - OFF (N.52 percent or Above).
11. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
12. Second Engine - START - Rcpeat steps 3 through 11.
13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. External Power Unit - DISENGAGE and REMOVE.
15. Generator Switches - ON.

4-8

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(eaenevrnrED

'RocEDURES)

*otto.

t*oTFJl,o#3

BEFORE TAX]ING
1. Passenger Briefing - COMPLETE.
2. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump

ffiX,"XP.YB}TARILY,

3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump -

dfiflMAl-,

check an-

check annunciator lights

-

Instrument Air Pressure - CHECK.
Fuel Control Heaters - ON.
Avionics Bus Switches - ON.
Inverter Switch - ON.
Avionics - AS REQUIRED.
Cabin Temperature Controls - AS REQUIRED.
10. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
11. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
12. Brakes - RELEASE.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

TAXIING
1. Brakes - CHECK.
2. Flight Instruments - CHECK.

BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Parking Brakes - SET.
2. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
3. Outside Air Temperature Gage - CHECK.
4. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK.
5. Fuel Crossfeed - CYCLE, then OFF.
6. Trim Tabs - SET.
?. Second Stall Warning - CHECK.
8. Wing Flaps - VERIFY T.O. Position.
9. Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
10. Autopilotfaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
11. Flight Controls - CHECK.
12. Avionics, Flight Instruments and Radar - CHECK and SET.

I
I

13. Overspeed Governors - CHECK.
14. Autofeather - CHECK.
15. Autofeather - ARM.
16. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
17. Annunciator Panel - CLEAR.

1 June | 987

4-9

SECTION 4

lrbnvAr

18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.

pnoceounes

(ABBREVTATED

eRocEDURES)

MODEL 406

Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.

Anti-collision Lights - ON.
Recognition Lights - ON (if installed).
Pitot/Static Heat - ON.
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
Parking Brakes - RELEASE.

TAKEOFF
1. Power - SET FOR TAKEOFF.
2. Arnunciators - CHECK, autofeather lights illuminated.
3. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
4. Rotate - VR (98 KIAS).
5. Airspeed - 102 KIAS until obstacles are cleared.
6. Brakes - APPLY momentarily.
7. Landing Gear - RETRACT.
8. Airspeed - 112 KIAS.
9. Wing Flaps - UP.

CLIMB
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Power - SET (Observe ITT, torque and N" RPM limits).
Propellers - Synchronize manually.
Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.
Airspeed - 140 KIAS (1i2 KIAS for maximum climb).
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.

CRUISE
1. Power - Set-Torque/RPM as desired (Observe ITT, torque and N,
RPM limits).
2. Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.
3. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
4. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - AS REQUIRED.
5. Autofeather - OFF.

la ro

1 June 1987

MODEL

406

lnesnevterED

eRooEDURES) ,o*to,. ,*ot"t8Jl?.S

DESCENT

^.

1. Cabin Heat Source Selector
and Cabin Heat Controls - AS REQUIRED.
2. Defroster Knob - PULL.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Autofeather - ARM.
5. Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.
?. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED (Open if descending into warm air)'
8. Altimeter - SET.
9. Passenger Advisory Lights - AS REQUIRED.
10. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.

BEFORE LANDING
1. Wing Flaps - T.O. or APPR below 200 KIAS.
2. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Landing Gear ' DOWN below 180 KIAS.
5. Wing Flaps - LAND.
6. Landing and Taxi Lights - AS REQUIRED.
?. Propeller SynchroPhaser - OFF.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD
9. AutopilotAaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
10. Approach Speed - 101 KIAS.
11. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE at touchdown.
12. Power Levers - GROUND IDI,E after touchdown.
13. Brakes and Reverse - AS REQUIRED.

BALKED LANDING
1.
2.
3.
4.

Power Levers - ADVANCE for takeoff power.

Balked Landing Transition Speed - 101 KIAS.
Wing Flaps - T.O..

Landing Gear - RETRACT during lFR.g.q-around or simulated IFR
go-around after establishing a positive rateof-climb.
5. Trim airplane for climb.
6. Airspeed - ACCEI,ERATE to 112 KIAS (after clearing obstacles). I
?. Wine Flaps - UP as soon as all obstacles are cleared and a safe
altitude and airspeed are obtained.

1 June 1987

4-11

SECTION 4
NORI,IAL PROCEDURES (ABBREVIATED PROCEDUBES)

MODEL 406

AFTER LANDING
1. Ice Protection Equipment - OFF.
2. Pitot/Static Heat - OFF.
3. Transponder - SBY.
4. Radar - STBY (if installed).
5. Anti-collision Lights - OFF.
6. Recognition Lights - OFF (if installed).
7. Wing Flaps - T.O.
8. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
9. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.

SHUTDOWN
1. Parking Brake - SET if brakes are cool.
2. Postflight ELT Check - COMPLETE.
3. Avionics Master Switches - OFF.
4. Inverter Swiich - OFF.
5. Fuel Control Heater Switches - OFF.
6. Accessory Switches - OFF.
7. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
9. ITT below 610 degrees Celsius for one minut€.
10. Fuel Control Levers - CUT OFF.
11. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - OFF.
12. Generator Swirches - OFF.
13. Battery Switch - OFF.

POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CHECK
1. VHF Communications Transceiver - ON and select 121.5 MHz'
2. Audio Control Panel - AS REQUIRED.
3. If Audible Tone Heard - Emergency Iocator transmitter switch OFF
then NORM.

4-12

Original lssue

MODEL

406

lreanevrnrED

pRocEDURES) ro^"o.

""3"t3J1H6

ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
OXYGEN SYSTEM (IF INSTALLED)

If

oxygen use is desired, proceed as follows:
1. Oxygen Control Knob - PULL ON.
2. Mask - Connect and put mask on.
3. Oxygen Flow Indicator - CHECK flow (green indicates flow).

HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS
Heater Operation - Ground:
1. Starting Engine Procedures - COMPLETED.
2. Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
3. Cabin Heat Auto Control - MANUAL.
4. Cabin Heat Manual Switch - AS DESIRED.
5. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
6. Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
Heater Operation - Flight:
1. Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
2. Cabin Heat Auto Control - AS DESIRED.
3. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.

Original lssue

4-13 (4-14 blank)

MODEL

406

1er'aer-rrreopRocEDURES)

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

AMPLIFIED NORMAL PROCEDURES
PREFLIGHT INSPECTION
The Preflight Inspection, described in Figure 4-1, is recommended for
the first,flight of the day Inspec.tion procedures for subsequent flights
may

De aDDrevraf,eo

at tne pttot s drscretlon.
M)TE

If

a subsequent nreflipht insnection is oerformpd

ihnrtly afier shitd6w-n, be aware that eniine air
intake leading ed.ge g.s well a.s exho.ust outlets
may be uem hot.

A.

If the airplanc has been in extended storage, has had recent major
maintenance or has been operated from marginal airports, a more extensive ext€rior iaspection is recommended.

. After rrajor maintenance has been performed, a thorough preflight
inspection, accordance with Figure 4-1, should be completcd. Pay pirticular attention to the security of access panels and dobrs and fr6e and
correct movement of control surfaces. If the airplane hae been waxed or
polished, check the external static pressure aource holes for obstructions.
The fire extinguisher bottles, located in main wheel well, should

be

checked for the properly serviced indication. The indicated pressure will
change with change in ambient temperature.

If the airplane has been exposed to much ground handline, or has
been parked in a crowded hangar. it should be checked for dents and
scratches on wings, fuselage and tail surfaces, as well as damage to
navigation, anti-collision and landing lights, deice boots and avionics
antennas.

Outside storage may result

in water and obstructions in

airspeed

lines, condensation in fuel tanks, and dust and dirt in- the engine
,-,' "ystgT
arr lnlet and exhaust areas. If anv water is detected in the fuel svstem.

the fuel tank sump quick-drain valves, fuel crossfeed line quick-drain
va.lves and fuel lllter quick-drain valves should all be thoroughly drained
until there is no evidence of water or sediment contaminaiion-. Outside
storage in windy or gusty areas, or adjacent to taxiing airplanes, calls for
special attention to control surface stops, hinges and brackets to detect
presence of wind damage. The recommended use of the control locks will
remove this problem.

Prolonged storage of the airplane will result in a water buildup in the
fuel which "leaches out" the fuel additive. An indication of this is when
an excessive amount of water accumulates in the fuel tank sumps. Refer
to Section 8 for fuel additive servicins.

Original lssue

4-15

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

{AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

Exhaust stubs and the exhaust heated inlet scuppers inside each stub
should be inspected for overall condition prior to each flight. Missing. or
cracked scuppers may prevent the continuous inlet heat from operating
prope y.

If the airplane has been operated from muddy fr-e.lds- or in snow or
slush, check- the main gear and nose gear wheel yqlls f91 obstructions
and cleanliness. Operation from a gravel or cinder field will require extra
attention rc propdller tips and hoiizontal stabilizer leading edg-es where
abrasion can' be' encoun-tered. Propeller stone damage can seriously reduce the fatigue life of the blades'
Freouentlv check all components of the landing gear retracting mechanisms,'shocl struts, tires and brakes. This is esp€cially, important on
aimlanes oneratins from rouqh frelds and/or high altitudes. Improperly
ierviced shirck strits could ciuse excesgive landing and taxi loads on the
airplane structure. Landing gear shock struts should be checked before
nisltt to ensure they-aie not collapsed' This can readily be deter"^"il
nined b1 a visual inspection of the shoik strut lower piston assembly. If
surface of the lower piston assembly is not visible. the
ttr"
"ttpiint"a
sliock
itrut is collapsed and must be serviced before the airplane is
collapsed (zero ent€nsion) shock strut could cause
opet ted. A completeiy
-landing
gear retraction syst€m. Airplanes that are
a'malfunction i; the
6sfeciatly
at high i titudes, are subjected to
rough
fields,
froop"iut"O
abnormal landing gear abuse.

mahe sure the fuel tank filler caps are
To nrevent loss of fuel in flieht,
-venLs
on the lower surface of the tanks
sealed. The fuel tank
sliouli also be inspected for obstructions, ice or water, especially after
operation in cold, wet weather.

tisfitii

The interior inspection will vary according to, the plannq4 flight.and
the oDtional equipment installed. Prior to high-altitude flights. it (iIis
imporiant to ch-eci< the condition and quantity of oxygen face masks
i""'taUeal and hose assemblies. The oxygen supply system (if installed)
should bb functionally checked to ensur6 that it is in working order. The
o"vgutt p."".ut" sagd (if installed) should indicate 300 to 1850 pounds
pei "squate inch dEpinding upon the anticipated requirements.

Satisfactory operation of the fuel control heaters, pitot- tubes, static
sources and itall- warning transmitter heating elements is determined by
observins a discharge olithe ammeter when the fuel control, pitot/static
and stali vane switihes are turned ON' Actuating the pitot/static and
stall vane switches for 20 seconds, immediately prior to the exterior
elements sufficiently so they will feel
inspeclion. will warm the heating-inspection.
lf operation of the static
warm to ihe touch during the
source heaters is questionable, -run the back- of -a finger from the fuselage
skin across the stitic port and then onto the fuselage skin. If operation
is still ouestionable, the effectiveness of these heating elements can be
verified'by cautiously feeling the heat of these devices while the
Ditot/static heat switches are on.
4-16

Original lssue

MODEL

406

sEcloN

lnver-rrreo pRocEDUREs)

4

NORMAL PBOCEDURES

If the emergency landing gear extension T-handle was noticed to be
partly extended during, the cockpit preflight lnppection. the emergency

Jandrng gear exlension blow down valve assembly should be reset a1 th'e
blowdown bottle in the left nose compartment in accor&nce with the
airplane Maintenance Manual. If the rld band is visible, the blowdown
bottle must be serviced in accordance with the airplane Maintenance
Manual before flight. lf the red band is not showins, push the cable
towards the valve assembly, then check the bottle -pressure gage for

norm{u pressure.

Flights at night and in cold weather involve a careful check of other
specific areas which will be discussed later in this section.

BEFORE ENGINE STARTING
1.

Preflight - COMPLETE.

2. Crew Door - LATCHED and SECURE.
3. Cabin Door(s) - LATCHED and SECURE.
a

6.
7.
8.

9.
10.
11.

t2.
13.

14.

Baggage

- SECURE.

Parking Brale - SET.
Control Locks - REMOVE.
Seat, Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - ADJUST and SECURE.
Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFT.
Cabin Heat Source Selector - OFF.
Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
All Switches and Circuit Breakers - OFF and SET.
Generator Switches - CHECK OFF.

Battery Switrh - ON.
Interior and Erterior Lights - AS REQUIRED.
a. Master Lighting Swit{h , AS REQUIRED.
b. Panel Lights - AS REQUIRED.
c. External Lights - CHECK OFF.
I{OTE

Ground oper.ation of the high intensity anticollision tighls can be of.considerablc annoyance
Lo

Erouna personnet and other pllots.

15. Passenger Advisory Lights - ON.
16. Larding Gear Switch - DOWN; Check Green

Original lssue

Lights - ON.

4-17

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEOURES

1AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

1?. Annunciator Panel and Warning Lights - PRESS-TO-TEST.
a. Annunciator Panel Master
Warning Lights - PRESS to reset mast€r warning.
l{olE

The press-to-test function wiLI also test the
landi.ig gear warning horn, stall warning horn,
autopiloi mode repeater annunciators, aLL marh'
er bbacon tights, altitude alert annunciator and
the RN ani BC lights in the NAV 2 Indicator'
The gyro inuerter and auionics bus switches
nust 6e ON to check the light displays in the
autop ilo

t

mo

de selecto r.

18. Firewall Shutoff Switches - DEPRESS, Bleed Off or Optional Fire
Bottle Armed lights illuminated; DEPRESS again, lights go out.

ANY TIME THE WHITE FIRE EXTINGUISHER LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINA'|ED,
DEPRESS/NG THE BUTTON WILL FIRE
THE BOTTLE.
19. Fuel

Quantity - CHECK.
(if installed).

20. Fuel Totalizer - SET

21. Air Conditioner - OFF.
Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.

THE PROPELLER NEVERSING LINKAGE
CAN BE DAMAGED IF THE POWER LEVERS ARE MOVED AFT OF THE FLIGHT

IDLE DETENT WHEN THE ENG/NES ARE
NO? Rt/NNING.
Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.
24. Fuel Control Levers - CUTOFF.

4-18

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(rurpurreo pRocEDUREs)

SECTION 4

NORMAL PROCEDURES

ENGINE STARTING (Battery Stan)
Voltmeter - CHECK (24 volts minimum).
- CLEAR.
Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annuncrator light ON, FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciator OFF.
Start Switch - START.
Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
Fuel Control Lever - RUN above 12 percent N" .
7. ITT and Ns - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius maximun).
1.

2. Propellers

IF NO ITT R/SE 13 OBSERVED WITHIN 10
SECONDS AFTER MOVING THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVDR TO RUN. OR ITT RAP-

IDLY APPROACHES

1O9O DEGREES CELSIUS. MOVE THE FUEL CONTROL LEVER

TO CUT-OFF AND PENFORM ENGINE

CLEARING PROCEDURE.

8. Stari Light - OFF above 42 percent Ns.
9. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or Above).
10. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
11. Power Lever - Increase to 68 percent N. .
12. Generator Switch - ON.
13. After g€nerator output decreases below 200 amperes, repeat steps
through 10, and 12 on opposite engine.

2

M)TE

ODuring a cross start of either engine the ENG
START lieht for the lirst engine slarted. may
blink as the enEine being started nears the end
ol its start cyile. Norially the tight uill not
blink but if it does it is acceptable.

OIf eith.er ENG START light remains ON after
engine stqrt, the stdrt relay or cross start rel,ay
is clnsed. Perforrn SHUTDOWN.

14. Power Levert - FLIGHT IDLE.

Do not operate or, Il.irrror", d.uring

engine

starts,

Original lssue

4-19

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

{AMPLIFIEDPROCEDURES)

MODEL 406

ENGINE STARTING (With External Power)
1. Battery and Generator Switches - OFF.

SHOULD THE EXTERNAL POWER UNIT
DROP OFF LINE DURING START, A TOTAL
,LOSS O,F ELECTRICAL POWEN WILL RESULT WHICH COULD RESULT IN A HOT

START

(ITT WILL BE

INOPERATIVE).

SHOULD A IOSS OF ELECTNICAL POWER
OCCUR, IMMEDIATELY PLACE THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVER TO CUT OFF, TURN THE

BATTERY SWITCH ON, MONITOR ITT
AND ENSURE THE ENGINE IS SHUTTING
DOWN. PLACE THE STARTER SWITCH TO
THD MOTOR ONLY POSITION TO AID IN
REDUCING ITT IF NECESSARY.
M)TE

When an external power unit is used, ensure
the unit is negatioe[y ground.ed dnd regulated to
28 uolts DC with a capability of prouiding a
minimum ol 800 amperes during the starting
cycle. Exlernal power units with output exceeding 1700 amperes shall not be used.

Unit - ENGAGE; then ON.
- CLEAR.
Fuel Auxiliarv
ON. Check AUX PUMP ON annunciatnr light ON,
Boost Pump
- - FUEL
PRESS LOW annunciator light - OFF.
Start Switch - START.
Ignition Light - CHECK ON.
Fuel Control Lever - RUN above 12 percent N, . naximum).

2. External Power

3. Propellers
,1

o.
7.

IF NO ITT R/SE 15 OBSERVED WITHIN 10
SECON'S AFTER MOVING THE FUEL
CONTROL LEVER TO RUN, OR ITT RAPIDLY APPROACHES 1O9O DEGREES CEL.
SIUS, MOVE THE FUEL CONTROL LEVER
TO CUT OFF, START SWITCH OFF AND
PERFORM ENG/NE CLEARING PNOCEDURES.
4-20

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(ar',rpr-rrreo pRocEDUREs)

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

8. ITT and N. - MONITOR (1090 degrees Celsius rnaximum).
9. Start Light - OFF above 42 percent N, .
10. Start Switch - OFF (Ns 52 percent or above).

I1. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
72. Second Engine

' START - Repeat steps 3 through

11.

I{OTE

ODuring a cross start of either engine the ENG
START light for the first engine started mat/
blink as the engine being started nears the end
ol its start cycle. NormalLy the Light wilL not
blink but if it d.oes it is acceptabLe.

OIf either ENG START light

remains ON
start relny or cross
start relay is closed.. Petorm SHUTDOWN.
stead.y after engine start, the

13. Battery Switch - ON.
14. External Power Unit - DISENGAGE and REMO\rE.
15. Generator Switches - ON.
Engine starts may be made with airplane battery power or with an
external power unit. However, it is recommended that an external power
unit be used when the ambient air temperature is less than 0 dLgrees
Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius). Refer to Cold Weather Operation ir
this section when ambient temperature is below 0 degrees Fahrenheit
(-18 degrees Celsius).

Before engine starting with the airplane batteries, check the voltmeter

for a minirnum of 24 volts. After startins the first encine, allow the
generator charge rate to decrease below 20d amperes before starting the
Secono englne.

With turbine engines, the operator must monitor ITT during each
engine start to guaid against a'"hot" start. The operator must be ready
to immediately stop the start if ITT exceeds 1090 degrees Celsius or is
raoidlv aonroachina this limit. Usuallv "hot" scarts are not a problem if
thi n6rm'al startin[ procedures are followed. A "hot" start is caused by
excessive fuel flow at normal revolutions per minutc or normal fuel flow
with insufficient revolutions per rrinute. The latter is usually the problern which is caused by attempting a start with low battery voltage. If a
cold encine does not o-,rite iate at"52 percent, it is acceptable to a-dvance

If the staitc accelerates the gas generator
rapidly above 20 percent, suspect gear train decouple. Do not continue
start. Rapid acceleration through 35 percent Ns suggests a start on the
secondary nozzles. Anticipate a hot start.
the poier lever slightly.

Original lssue

4-21

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

{AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

it is essential before the
drain off -unburnt fuel'
time
to
attempt to allow adequate
-from
could- lead to a hot
""ii'.t"ti
engine
fuel
the
residual
f'uit"." to drain'all
sGrt, a hor streah leading to hot section damage. -or. the. torching of
buming fuel from engine eihaust on the next successful igrition.
A.fter an aborted start for whatever reason,

A dry motoring, within start€r limitation after confirming- that all fuel
drainagt has stopled, will ensure that no fuel is trapped before the next
starl.

ENGINE CLEARING PROCEDURES
1. Fuel Control Lever - CUTOFF.
2. Fuel AuxiliarY Boost PumP - ON.
3. Start Switch - MOTOR.

DO NOT EXCEED THE S']:ARTING CYCLE
LIMITATIONS; REFER TO SECTION

2,

4. Start Switch - OFF
5. FueI AuxiliarY Boost PumP - OFF.

ENGINE IGNITION PROCEDURES
switch is left q -t-he NOR|'I nosiFor most operations,
-i*it"h the ignition
in thii position, ignition is oN onlv when the
tioir]'w-l*, it E
starter switch is in the START position.
However. the ienition swikh should be truned ON to provide continuous ignition undei the following conditions:
1. Emergency engine starts without starter assist.
2. Operation on wat€r or slush covered runways.
3. Flight in heavy PreciPitation'

ha"c been in
BYPASS for 5 minutes'
5. When near fuel exhaustion as indicated bv RESERVOIR FUEL
LOW annunciator ON.

4. During inadvert€nt icing encounters until the inertial

4-22

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(nr"rpr:rreo

pRocEDuRES) *o""or

r"ot"t8Jl*S

BEFORE TAXIING
1. Passenger Briefing - COMPLETE.
2. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pump - OFF momentarily, check AUX
PUMP ON and FUEL PRESS LOW
annunciators - OFF.
3. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - NORMAL, check annunciator
lights - OFF.
Instrument Air Pressure - CHECK.
Fuel Control Heaters - ON.
Avionics Bus Switches - ON.
Inverter Switch - ON.
Avionics - SET.
9.. Cabin Temperature Controls - AS REQUIRED.
a. If heating/defrosting are desired:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.

4.
5.
6.
?.
8.

TOTE

Manual Cabin Heat Control will oDen and clnse
the tentperdture control ualue lasier thnn Auto
Cabin Heat Control.

(2) Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
(3) Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
b. If ventilation is required:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - OFF.
(2) Fresh Air Fan Switch - LOW or HIGH.
(3) Ram Air Knob - PUSH.
(4) Defrost and Cabin/Cockpit Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
(5) Overhead Ventilation Blower Switch (If Instaled) - HIGH

or LOW.
10. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
11. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
M)TE

Do not use reuerse unless the propeller control
Leuers are in the full forward position.
12. Brakes - RELEASE.

Original lssue

4-23

SECTION 4
NORi,l!AL PROCEDURES

1AMPLIFIED

PBOCEDURES) MODEL 406

TAXIING
1. Brakes - CHECK.
2. Flight Instruments - CHECK.

A steerable nosewheel, interconnected with the rudder system, provides positive control up Lo 15 degrees left or right, and free -turning
from i5 desrees I"o 50 degrees for tharp turns during taxiing. Norma-l
steerins mai be aided thro-ugh use of difierential braling and differential
power 6tr tlie main wheels. These aids are listed in the preferred order of
irse. Do not use excessive brake on the inboard side to effect a tuming
radius as decreased tire life will result.
l{otE

If the airnlane is parhed uith the nosewheel
iastered. in eithei direction, initial taxiing
shoul.d. be done uith caution. To strdighten the
nosewhnel use full opposite rudder and d.ifferential power instead of differential brahing.
After a few feet of foruard. trauel, th.e nosewheel
wiLI steer normalLy.

When taxiilg near buildings or other stationary objects, observe the
minimum tumiirg distance limits; refer to Section 7. No ab,normal precautions are required when taxiing in conditions of high winds.

At some tine early in the taxi run, the brakes should be checked for
anv unusual reaction, such ari uneven bra-king. The horizontal situation
indicator should be checked for normal slaving and cross-checked with
the standbv mametic compass. Normal slavinE is indicated by oscillations of th6 gyro slaving indicator about the null point {45 degrees fixed
reference line on the HSI).
Taxi speed can be reduced by using normal bra-kir:g or by retarding
the oowei levers toward reverse aB des-ired' Minimize the use of reverse
thruit on unprepared surfaces. Placing one propeller into feather can aid
in reducing taxiing speed.

4-24

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(nrr,lpr-rrreopRocEDURES)

SECTION 4

NORMAL PROCEDURES

BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. Parking Brakes - SET.
2. Engine Instruments - CHECK.
3. Outside Air Temperature Gage - CHECK.
4. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK. 200 pounds per side minimum. Do not exceed 300 pounds
asymmetric fuel loading.

5. Fuel Crossfeed - CYCLE, then OFF.
6. Trim Tabs - SET elevator, aileron and rudder tabs in
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

,h"l

TAKEOFF range.
Second Stall Warning - CHECK.
a. Elevator - FULL Nose up.
b. Wing Flaps - EXTEND to LAND position.
c. Stall Warning Horn - VERIFY operation.
d. Wing Flaps - RETRACT to T.O. position.
e. Stall Warning Horn - VERIFY Horn silences.
Wing Flaps - VERIFY T.O. position.
Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
Autopilot/Yaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
Flight Controls - CHECK.
Avionics, Flight Instruments and Radar - CHECK and SETOverspeed Governors - CHECK (first flight of the day and after
maintenance).

a. Propeller Control Lever - FORWARD.
b. Governor Switch - TEST.
c. Power Levers - INCREASE RPM. Propeller should stabilize at
1725 + 50 RPM.
Power Levers - DECREASE RPM.
e. Governor Switch - RELEASE (switch is springJoaded to NOR-

d.

MAL).
14. Autofeather - CHECK (every flight).
a. Autofeather Switch - TEST.
b. Power Levers - INCREASE until torques are 400 foot-pounds.
Assure that both AUTO FIHER ARM annunciator lights are illuminated. Slowly retard the
LH power lever to FLIGHT IDLE noting_that
in sequence: The R AUTO FTHER ARM annunciator extinguishes, the L AUTO FTHER
ARM annunciator extinzuishes
below 225 footpounds torque and the -LH propeller begins to
feather. Increase the Ieft torque to 400 footpounds. Repeat procedure for right engine.

1 June 1987

4-25

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

NOTE

OTurbine inertia during leather may driue
toroue rasL the switch set point and cquse thc
AUTO' FTHER ARM anninciator to cvcLe off
and on.

aProper system operation i's cont'irmed once the
oroniller bepins to feather' ll is not necssary to
'susiain
thelest conditions until the propeLler is

fully feathered.
oCold. engine oil may cause slow propel,l,er
Assure that the propeLler
feathering
'beeins td response
leaiher within 4 seconds after the
second. annunciator extinguishes.

c. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
15. Autofeather - ARM.
16. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
1?. Annunciator Panel - CLEAR.

18'IceProtectionEquipmentgtfttos"*"tt.f,*tt""*i"$Yrt"T?ttlf
outside air temperature below 4 degrees
Celsius (40 degrees Fahrenheit).

a. Heated Windshield - CHECKED.

b. Stall Vane Heat - AS REQUIRED
c. Propeller Deice - AS REQUIRED.
d. Engine Inertial Separator Switches - AS REQUIRED'

19. Anti-collision Lights - ON
20. Recognition Lights - ON (if installed).
21. Pitot/Static Heat - ON.
22. Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.
23. Parking Brakes - RELEASE.

Ensure the Before Takeoff Checklist is followed to pr€vent nissing an
important item.

The flieht and engine instruments should be checked -for normal
be set and
i"ai""ti"ti-*ittt "o *ii"i"g flags visible' All avionics should
altimeters
io. correct freque"ncieJ or operational modes' The with
each
press
crosschecked
re,
then
"hecGa
field
i"po.t6a
;i;;IJ b;-;"i;
other and against field elevation.

4-26

1 June 1987

MODEL

406

(nvprrrreo

PRocEDURES)

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

A mental review of all engine inoperative speeds, procedures and field
length requirements should be made before takeoff. Also, review the
normal speeds and power limits (torque, ITT and fuel flow).
NOTE

Ensure ueight d.oes not exceed 9360 pound.s before takeoff.

TAKEOFF
1. Power - SET FOR TAKEOFF (1382 foot-pountls torque maximum).

2. Annunciators - CHECK Autofeather Armed Lishts - Illuminated.

.DO

NOT TAKE OFF WITH AUTO-

FEATHER INOPERATIVE.

.AUTOFNATHER ARM ANNUNCIATON
LIGHTS SHOULD ILLUMINATE BETWEEN 80 AND 86% N. AND REMAIN
ILLUMINATED AT HIGHER N" SETT.
INGS.
Engine Instruments - CHECK.
Rotate - VR (98 KIAS).
Airspeed - 102 KIAS until obstacles are cleared.
Brakes - APPLY momentarily.
Landing Gear - RETRACT. Check GEAR UNLOCKED and HYD
PRESS ON lights off.
8. Speed at 50 feet - 102 KIAS.
9. Best Rate-of-Climb Speed - 112 KIAS.
10. Wing Flaps - UP.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Before initiating the taleoff roll, a go, no-go decision should have
been made in the event an engine failure should occur. Review the
anticipated performance presented in Section 5 and assure that the
operating weight limits of Section 2 are r'ot exceeded. In addition, review
the applicable procedures and speeds associated with one-engine operation so that the transition (in the event of an engine failure) will be
smooth, positive and safe. If the anticipated performance exceeds the
runway length available or obstacle clearance requirements cannot be
achieved, it is recomqrended to take off on a more favorable runway,
off-load the airplane until the anticipated performance is consistent with
existing conditions or delay the takeoff until more favorable atmospheric
conditions exist.
'I June 1987

4-27

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

Full oower operation is recommended on takeoff since it is important
that V,'is obtained as rapidly as possible. Accelerate the airplane Lo V'
before iotaiion for addit ional safety in case of an engine failure.
Takeoff roll is most smooihly initiated by gradually advancing the
power levers until the propeller revolutions per - minute.- nears 1900.
il{esitate slightly to alloiv ihe engine to appioach stabilization. then
smoothlv re'ieas! the brakes and iontinue advancing power levers to
fotq.r"" until the takeoff limi.t (1382 foot-pounds) is reached'
-"t"h
(tJnless rea'djusted. torque will increase approximate$ 50 foot-pounds as
Ievers are advanced too far
ioeed builds'up during'takeoff roll.) If power
'
a surge as.the prope-ller
expect
iriitial
application.
during
iapidly
6o
.
-beein
demanding greater blade angle. For maximum perfornovernb.s
hance takeolf power should be set before brake release. On runways
where propeller'damage from foreign objects is likely, allowing speed lo
t"iia bifoie applying iull power miy be- beneficial. Allowing the propeli"." ti-" to sirooi ui befoie applying takeoff torque during a touch and
go landing will minimize any asymmetric thrust.
For irosswind takeoffs the airplane is accelerated to a slightly higher
than normal rotation speed, and then is pulled off abruptly.to preir'ent
posslbi; settling back tb the runway while drifting. When -clear of the
|ound. a coord'inaled turn is made jnto the wind to correct for &ift.

After rotation at 98 KIAS, allow the airspeed to increase to Vr.
Maintain 102 KIAS until the obstacles have be cleared.
On lons runwavs, the landing gear should be retracted at the point
over the irnway where a wheels-down forced landing on that runway
would become impractical. However, on shoft runways, it mqy be preferable to retract th6 landing gear after the airplane is safely airborne.
Before retracting the landing gear, apply the b-rales momentarily -to
ston the rotation 6f the main-wheels. Centrrugal force caused by the
rao'idlv rotatins wheels expands the diameter of the tires, and if ice or
ti* accud, .t"d in the wheel wells, the rotatirg wheels may rub as
-ia
they enter.

To establish climb configuration, retract the landing g-ear, allow airto increase to 112 KIAS, retract the wing flaps and then increase
airspeed to 140 KIAS. Maintain taleoff power.
soeed

CLIMB
1. Power - SET - Torque/RPM as desired (Observe ITT, Torque and
N. RPM limits).
2. Propellers - SYNCHRONIZE manually'
3. Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired.

l+-za

1 June 1987

MODEL
4.

406

sEcTloN 4

lnuerrrreo

Recommended Climb Sr:eed

-

CLIMB SPEED

PRESSURE

KIAS

ALTITUDE " FEET

5L

rO TZ,UUU

125

12,000 to 20,000

0

20.000 to 30.000

1't

5. Speed for Maximum Climb - 112 KIAS (if
6. Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.

^

NORMAL PROCEDURES

PRocEDURES)

required).

Normally, maximum climb power is maintained during the climb to
cruise altitude. Adjust the power levers as required to prevent exceeding
1382 foot-pounds torque or a nominal climb ITT of 680 degrees Celsius,
whichever'occurs first.
NOTE

To prolong engine Life, d.o not exceed, 680

grees Celsius

ITT

d.e-

d.uring cLimb.

This power setting provides the best performance and range. At Iower
altitudes and outside air temperatures (below approximately 15,000 feet),
the engines will reach the torque limit before reaching the ITT or N"
limit. As the climb progresses, the ITT and N, will increase until ar
altitude is reached where the ITT or N, will dicta:te power lever positioning. When operating near the ITT limit, advance pirwer levers ilowly to
allow current ITT to be indicated. The rate of power (and temperature)
increase of the engine is greater than the response rate of the ITT
therefore, a rapid power lever advance could allow an overtemperature
condition to exist momentarily in the engine before the overtemperature
would be indicated.
Prior to engaging the synchrophaser system, the propellers revolutions
per minute must be closely synchronized manually (confrrm with a check
of the propeller tachometers) due to the limited capture range feature of
the system.

After light illumination, confirm the propeller revolutions per minute
has not exceeded 1900 revolutions per ninute. The propeller revolutions
per minute can be adjusted by symmetrically moving the propeller controls as required. The PHASE knob may then be rotated as required to
achieve the desired noise characteristics.

If a major propeller revolutions per minute change is made with the
synchrophaser system ON and the propeller controls are not moved
symmetrically, the sSmchrophaser rnay break lock resulting in propeller
speed oscillation. The system should be turned OFF, the propeller revolutions per minute reset manually and the synchrophaser turned back on.
For most normal flight operations, the cowl flaps may be allowed to
trail. In very hot arnbient conditions, it may be necessary to Iock the
cowl flaps fully open during climb.
1 June 1987

4-2sl

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES} MODEL 406

CRUISE
1' Power-

2.
3.
4.
5.

Set

torque/RPM-*if

i*1rlylru"tiIl;Tl"1f .s"1 T;
Maximum Cruise Powbr Chart in Section 5.
Propeller Synchrophaser - PHASE as desired'
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED.
Fuel Crossfeed Selector - AS R.EQUIRED.
Autofeather - OFF,

Do not exceed the maximum cruise torque shown in Section 5.
Normally, new engines should exhibit an ITT slightly below 695 degrees
Celsius when set to maximum cruise torque.
Before visible moisture is encount€red with outside air t€mperature
between -30 degrees Celsius (-22 degrees Fahrenheit) and 4 degrees
Celsius (40 desrees Fahrenheit), ensure the anti-icing systems
(windshield, pitoi/static, stall vane, propeller heat and -inertial separaiors) are ON and operating. These systems are desigr:ed to prevent ice
iormation, rather th'an removing it afur it has formed. Accumulation cf
somJ aitfiame ice is unavoidabl-e; this will increase airplane weight and
drae and decrease airspeed and general airplane performance. lt is always
wise to avoid icing conditions, if practical.

.IF THE ENGINE INERTIAL SEPARATOR
1S NO? POSITIONED TO BYPASS, MOISTURE MAY COLLECT UNDER THE ENGINE INLET SCREEN AND FREEZE. SUBSESUEN'TLY, THIS ICE MAY SEPARATE
AFfER ENCOIJN?ERING HIGHER OU'TSIDE TEMPENATURES WHICH COULD RE'
SULT IN ENGINE DAMAGE.
.SURFACE DEICE BOOT ACTUATION BELOW -40 DEGREES CELSIUS CAN RESULT
IN PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE DEICE
BOOTS, AC'IUATE ONLY AS NECESSAR Y
TO REMOVE ICE BELOW .40 DEGREES
CELSIUS.

.PROLONGED ZERO OR NEGATIVE "G"
MANEUVERS WILL STARVE THE ENGINE
OIL PUMP AND RESULT IN ENGINE DAM'
AGE.

4-30

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(nrurpr-rrteopRocEDUREs)

sEcTloN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

.WHEN FLYING IN ROUGH AIR, THE
PUU, 'qUXTUERY BOOST PUMPS WILL

ACTIVATE AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE
HOPPER FUEL FLOAT SWI'|CHES SENSE
A FUEL LEVEL BELOW APPROXIMATELY
230 POUNDS PEN TANK, IF'TRANSFER
FAIL" ANNUNCIATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
GO OFF, POSITION THE FUEL AUXILIARY
BOOST,SWITCH ITO "ON". POSITION THE
IGNITOR SWITCH TO "ON" IN ROUGH AIR
AT FUEL QUANTITIES BELOW 50 POUNDS
PER TANK.

aIGNITION SHOULD BE TURNET) ON
WNTN PTYTNC

IN

HEAVY PRECIPITA-

TION.

DESCENT
1. Cabin Heat Source Selector

and Cabin Heat Controls - AS DESIRED.

2. Defrost€r Knob - PULL'
a. If heating/defrosting are desired:
(1) Cabin Heat Source Select - BOTH.
(2) Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED'
(3) Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED'
I{OTE

Manunl Cabin Heat ControL uill open and clnse
the ternperdture control ualoe faster than Auto
Cabin Eeat Control.
- OFF.
ARM.
Autofeather
Ice Protection - AS REQUIRED.
Cowl Flaps - AS REQUIRED (Open if descending into warm air)'
Altimeter - SET.
Passenger Advisory Lights - AS REQUIRED
Seat Belts and Shoulder Harness - SECURE.

3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector
tl

6.
7.
8.
9.

Original lssue

4-31

sEcTtoN 4

NOBMAL PROCEDUBES

(AMPLTF|ED

PRocEouREs) MODEL 406

During descents wilh progressive power reductions. the synchrophaser
may remaln engaged. Belbre large propeller revolutions Der minute
changes, .the .synchrophaser _should 6e positioned to OFF. Manually
synchronize the propellers, then select the ON position of the synchropn:$er.

- To _prevent confusion in int€rpreting which 10,000-foot segment of
altitude. is being displayed on the altimeter, a striped
-at warning seigment is
exposed on the face of the copilot's altimeter
all altiiudei below
10,000 feet.

If

fuel has been consumed at uneven rates between the two tanks
of prolonged one engine inoperative flieht, it is desirable to
balance the fuel load by operating both ensines -from the fi.rllest tank.
Fuel balancing will occur fairly rapidlv when irossfeedile as both encines
will receive fuel from the fullest tank plus fuel will be t-ransferred t6 the
lightesi tank at 500 to 800 pounds pei hour. If there is sufficient fuel in
both tanks, even.though
have unequa.l quantities, it is impor-the-y Bay
tant to position the crossfeed
selector to OFF for the landins.
because

BEFORE LANDING
1. Wing Flaps - T.O. or APPR below 200 KIAS.
2. Fuel Quantity and Balance - CHECK. Maintain lateral balance
within 300 pounds differential.
3. Fuel Crossfeed Selector - OFF.
4. Landing Gear - Dovn below 180 KIAS. Check down lights - ON;
unlocked light - OFF.
5. Wing Flaps - LAND.
6. Landing and Taxi Lights - AS REQUIRED.
7. Propeller Synchrophaser - OFF.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FORWARD.
9. Autopilot/Yaw Damper - OFF (if installed).
10. Wing Flaps - LAND below 180 KIAS
11. Approach Speed - 101 KIAS.

DO NOT NAISE REVERSE TRIGGERS
IN FLIGHT.
12. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE at touchdown.
13. Power Levers - GROUND IDLE after touchdown.
14. Brakes and Reverse - AS REQUIRED.

4-32

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(rr',rpurreoPRoCEDURES)

SECTION 4

NORMAL PROCEDURES

Landing gear extension before landing is easily detected by a slight
in airplane trim and a slight "bump" as the gear locks down.
Illumination of the gear-down indicator lights (green) is further proof
that the gear is down and locked. The gear unlocked indicator light (red)
will illuiinate when the gear uploc[s are released and wilf remain
illuminated while the sear is in transit. The unlocked lieht will extinguish when the gear hai locked down. If it is reasonably cErtain that the
sear is down and one of the eear-down indicator lishts is still not
illuminated, the malfunction coul-d be caused by a burneid out light bulb.
This can be checked by pushing the annunciator panel press-to-test
button. If the bulb is burned out, it can be replaced with the bulb from a
post light. If the gear warning horn sounds at FLIGHT IDLE, the gear
may not be locked down.
change

A simple last-minute recheck on frnal approach should confirm that
all applicable switches are on, the gear-down indicator lights (green) are
illuminated and the gear unlocked indicator light (red) is extinguished.
Landings are conventional in every respect. A power approach is used
down to 50 feet above ground level using power as required to stabilize
the approach speed and attitude with wing flaps fully extended, landing
g"ar iitended ind airspeed of 101 KIAS.-A decision must be made aI
the 50-foot point to completc the landing or initiate a balked landing
climb using the appropriate procedure. The landing is completed by
retarding the power levers and intiating a flare into the landing attitude.
The airplane should touch down main wheels frnt slightly above stall
speed. The nose is then gently lowered to the runway, power levers are
positioned to GND IDLE and brakes applied as required. Al abrupt

power reduction could result in a hard landing. Landings on rough or
soft runways are done in a similar manner except that the nosewheel is
lowered to the runway at a lower speed to prevent excesgive nose gear
loads.

For minimum distance landings, a power reduction is initiated on
FLIGHT IDLE during
the laiding flare. The airplane should touchdown, main wheels fird
with minimum flare. The nose is then gently lowered to the runway,
power levers are positioned to GRND IDLE and brakes applied as
passing 50 feet. The power levers are retarded to

^

requrreo.

Maxirnum braking effectiveness is obtained by applying full even
to the toe brakes without locking the wheels and applying full
back nressure to the control column. Tliis procedure is reidnirnended
only for emergency stops aB excessive brake pid and tire wear will occur.
Maximum brake wear occurs at high speed.
pressure

Original lssue

+-o,,

sEcTloN 4

(AMPLIFTED

NORMAL PROCEDURES

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

When a short ground run is the major consideration, retard the power
to reverse as required. Do not exceed the maximum revene power
limits shown in Section 2. Maximum effective braking is initiated immediatelv while continuing to hold the control wheel full aft. If assymetric
reverie is experienced move po*", levers toward ground idle.
levers

NOTE

The airplane is conlrollable with proper pilol
Lechniqie, with only one engine/propeller lully
reuersid. and Lhe other ?ngine at ftiehl idle. The
power leuers should not ie rapidly reLqrded beiou ground idte until symmelrtc response is
uerifted.

II

For crosswind approaches, either the wingJow, crab or combination
method may be used. After touchdown lower the nosewheel and maintain
control. A itraight course is maintained with the steerable nosewheel,
and occasional b"raking if necessary. Excessive reversing on dirty runways
will accelerate propeller erosion.

BALKED LANDING
1. Power Levers - ADVANCE to takeoff power.
2. Balked Landing Transition Speed - 101 KIAS.
3. Wing Flaps - T.O..
NOIE

OExperience indicutes that retro'cting the landing gear during an operational .VFR go ground;

uhpn on tmmPdlatc Isndtng ts

contemploted'
has been cond.uciue to gear up landings.

aAluays t'olLow the Bet'ore Landing Chechlist.

4. Landing

Gear - RETRACT during IFR.g.q-around or simulated IFR

qo-around aftei establishing

a positive

rate-

of-climb
5. Trim airplane for climb.

I
II

6. Airspeed - ACCELERATE to 112 KIAS (after clearing obstacles).
as soon as all obstacles are cleared and a safe
z. Wine" Flaos
- - UP
allilude and airspeed are obtained.

4-34

'| June 1987

MODEL

406

sEcTroN
lnrurer-rrreopRocEDURES)

4

NORMAL PROCEDURES

AFTER LANDING
1. Ice Protection Equipment - OFF.
2. Pitot/Static Heat - OFF.
3. Transponder - SBY.
4. Radar - STBY (if installed).
5. Anti-Collision Lights - OFF.
6. Recognition Lights - OFF (if installed).
7. Wing Flaps - T.O.
8. Lights - AS REQUIRED.
9. Cowl Flaps - OPEN.
the active runway, the wing flaps should be retracted. Be
After leavins-flaps
switch is ide;tified beiore letracting the wing flaps.
sure the wing
The wing flips aie positioned to T.O. before the engines are shut down
to allow-a thorough preflight inspection of the flaps system before the
next flight.

SHUTDOWN
1.

Parking Brake - SET

if

brakes are cool.

2. Postflight ELT Check - COMPLETE.
3. Avionics Master Switches - OFF.
4. Inverter Switch - OFF.

Fuel Control Heater Switches - OFF.
6. Accessory Switches - OFF.
1. Power Levers - FLIGHT IDLE.
8. Propeller Control Levers - FEATHER.

9.

^

ITT

below 610 degrees Celsius for one ninute.

10. Fuel Control Levers - CUT OFF.
11. Fuel Auxiliary Boost Pumps - OFF.
12. Generator Switches - OFF.
13. Battery Switch - OFF.

If

dustv conditions exist or

if

the last flight of the day has

been

completed, install engine inlet and exhaust covers to protect the engines
from debris. The covers may be installed after the engines have cooled
down (ITT indicators showing "off scale" temperatures)' Secure propellers to prevent windmilling with no oil pressure.

Original lssue

4-35

sEcTroN 4
NORMAL

PROCEDURES

{AMPLIFIED

PROCEOURES)

MODEL 406

POSTFLIGHT EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
CHECK
1. VHF Communications Transceiver - ON and select
2. Audio Control Panel - AS REQUIRED.

121.5 MHz.

NOTE

Do not trqnsml.t on 121.5 MHz unless there
qn etlergency.

is

3. If Audible Tone Heard - Emergency Locator Transmitter Switches
OFF than NORM.

As long as the function selector switch on emergency locator transmit-

ter remains in the AUTO position, the

emerg€ncy locator transmitter

automatically actuates following an impact of 5 g's or more over a short
period of time.

If the ernergency locator transmitter can be heard transmitting, place
the function selector switch in the OFF position and the tone should
cease. Immediately place the function selector switch in the AUTO
position to reset the emergency locator transmitter for normal operation.
ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
OXYGEN SYSTEM

If

(lf Installed)

oxygen use is desired proceed as follows:
1. Oxygen Control Knob - PULL ON.

PERMIT NO SMOKING WHEN USING
OXYGEN. OIL, GREASE, SOAP, LIPSTICK, LIP BALM AND OTHER FAMY
MATERIALS CONSTITUTE A SERIOUS
FIRE HAZARD WHEN IN CONTACT
WITH OXYGEN. BE SURE HANDS AND
CLOTHING ARE OIL-FREE BEFORE
HANDLING OXYGEN EQUIPMENT.

2. Mask - CONNECT and put on mask.
3. Oxygen Flow Indicator - CHECK Flow (green indicates flow).
4. Disconnect hose coupling and push control knob in when not in
use.

4-36

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(nvpurreo

eRocEDURES) *o"ro. r"ot"tFJL?.3

HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS
Heater Operation - Ground:
1. Starting Engine Procedures - COMPLETED.
2. Cabin Heat Source Selector - BOTH.
3. Cabin Heat Auto Control - MANUAL.
M)?E

Manual Cabin Heat Control will open snd close
the tempera.ture control ualue fasier than Auto
Cabin Heat ControL.

4. Cabin Heat Manual Switch - AS DESIR.ED.
5. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.
6. Cabin Heat Auto Control - ROTATE AS DESIRED.
Heater Operation - Flight;
1. Cabin Heat Source Selector - BOTH.
2. Cabin Heat Auto Control - AS DESIRED.
3. Defrost and Cockpit/Cabin Air Knobs - AS DESIRED.

OTHER NORMAL PROCEDURES
FIRE DETECTION AND EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM (IF
INSTALLED)
Fire extinguisher bottle pressures will vary considerablv with ambient

Lemperature. The lire exti::guisher bot-lle gages. are calibrated to indicate
p_roper charge based on -temperature. Gage readings must be at or above
the pressure. corr€sponding to the ambient temperaturc to indicate a
propeny sen.lceo Dotue,

STALL
The stall characteristics of the aimlane are conventional. Aural warning is provided by the gtall warning horn between 5 and 10 KIAS above
the stall in all configurations. The wing flaps UP stall is also preceded
by a moderate aerodynamic buffet whi;h iircreases in intensiW
-byas the
s[a-ll is approached. 'The wing flaps LAND stall is preceded
light
buff-et just priqr to the- stall. The power-on stall occuis at a ver.i steep
pitch angle with or without flaps. Ii is difficult to inadverbently
sial th;
-range
airplane -during normal maneuvering. Due to the large speed
be-the
[ween wing flaps UP and wing flapi LAND stall spe;ds,
immidiate
relraction of wing flaps from LAND to UP should be avoided at slow
speeds. Follow all recommended procedures for wing flap retraction.

Original lssue

SECTION 4
NOBMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

MANEUVERING FLIGHT

No aerobatic maneuvers, inctuding spins, are approved in this airpU"J; [6*"".., the airplane is convinti6nal in all respects through the
^maneuvering range encountered in normal flight.
NIGHT FLYING
Before starting the engines for

a night flight' position the master
rheostats to provide

t" T.liGHr uttd idiutt ihe

"'ilj'jiirtiiii"iiitin
illumination to check all swikhes, controls, etc'
'enoueh

Navigation lights. ajq then checked by observing. reflec.t'ions from the
lights should be
oavement or qround. t ne operation
-i"fl;tion"of tle anti-collisionA-fter
starting th9
the
on
if,"iilii'^6i'.,"u'.-e*i;e-tit"
Eound
cnecKeo
rray
be
lights
eneines. the retractable landing
-switches
-ext€nded -and
to oFF turns the
1t.,"-l"iaitie light
lights off, birt leaves them extended.

;lil;ilif.

'R":il;ft

Before taxi, the int€rior lighting intensity is normally de.creased to the

?l^*ttl"ti uti itt" Zontr-ols and s-witches are visible' The taxi
-i"iiiti.tit
iigil l[*n b€ turned on prior to taxiing at night.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Use of an APU is recommended when ambient temperatures are below
0 degrees Fahrenheit (-18 degrees Celsius)'

THE WrNGS AND TArL SU&!-AC-ES
ntusr nn CLEAR OF ICE' SNOry AN.2
PRroR To rAKEoFg 4s
iiosr CHARACTERISTICS
-TiIENi
CAN BE
ADVERSELY AFFEuIED.

Durins operation in cold wet weather, the possibility-of brake freezing
special pieca"tions should b-e taken' When spyere ic;nq
weather conditions - -exist' parked
""#til'iii"iJt".",
;;' ;'.;;;i;;-ilisi"ie uilttt freezing
;oif""ondition"
(not set)' If .ice is found
;irnG;illi;tfi-fi; tt"l". i"inspeclio", heat the
brakes with a ground
"t#ir"ail
d;-tltg
il
it"ni+t
-irt"
"u"a
are removed' If a
moisture
of
uii
tta"""
l"u'ti"it.
tt".i". J"i
alcohol
pour
isopropvl
.p.uv
i;
;;;-;;ii"bi;,'
Ii8fia"r'titlii the brakes to remove the tce.
.o'
iMIL-F-5566) on

4-38

Original lssue

MODEL

406

rer.,rpr-rrreopRocEDuBES)

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

IF BRAKES ARE DEICED USING ALCOHOL,
ENSURE ALCOHOL HAS EVAPORATED
FROM THE RAMP PRIOR TO STARTING
ENGIN'S AS A FIRE COULD RESULT.

If neither heat or alcohol is available, frozen brakes can sometimes be
freed by actuating the brakes several times using maximum brake pressule.

^

When airplane is,stopnqd on the _taxiway or runway and brale fteezeup occurs, actuate the brake several times using maximum pressure. To
raduce possibility of brake freeze-up during taxi operations in severe
weathei conditions, two taxi slowdowns (from 35 to 15 MPH) using firm
brake pressure may be made permitting brakes to reach a warm condition ivaporating iny moistur6 build utwithin the brake.

After take off from slush-covered runways or taxiways, leave landing
a short period, allowing wheels to spin' This will allow
ientrifueal force to throw off any accumulated slush which should preclude fr6zen brakes on landirg. Ensure wheels are stnpped before retracting the landing gear to prevent buildup of ice or slush in the wheel
qear down for

wells.

During cruise, electrical equipment shouid be managed- to assure adequate ge"nerator charging throughout the flight, since cold weather adversely affects batt€ry capacity.

Prior to landing, and with gear down, maximum brake pressure should
be applied several-times to alleviate any brake freeze-up caused by icing
in tlie brake assembly during flying conditions.

Original lssue

4-39

sEcroN

4

NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

AVIONICS SYSTEMS NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE

When operating airplanes equipped with optional ARC 1000 series auionics, refer to Section 9
for the appropriate auionics operational proced.ures and. Limitatinns.

1OOO

AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

1. VOL HDST/SPKR
Control - Initial setting of both controls at 2 o'clock position. The
VOL HDST outer concentric knob sets the master volurre level for the headsets. The VOL SPKR inner concentric knob sets the master volume level of the speaker.
ltotE

Set the indiuidunl uolume controls of each receiuer onLy after setting the master uolume leuel
controls on the aud.io control Danel.

2. INTERCOM ON/OFF
Selector Switch - AS REQUIRED. When the switch is set to the
ON position

it

provides communication between

pilot and copilot without having to actuate any
microphone button. In dual installations, setting
either of the INTERCOM selector switches to
ON provides intercommunication- During transpilot or copilot wheel microphone buttons are pressed, the interphone function is muted
mrssrons where the

iIOTE

OThe interphone leueL is ad.justable only
throu4h the master HDST or SPKR controls
and shouLd be ad.justed from the initial 2 o'clock

setting to the d.esired. leuel before the indiuidual
receiuer controls are set to their final d.esired
leuel.

)The

speaker interphone function shnul.d onLy
be used. with oxygen mask microphones because
the normal lip rnicrophones will cause a feedback squeal in the cockpit.

Olntercornmunication between piht and copilat
should not be attempted using the hand-h.eld
microphone, since keying the microphone uill
hey the transmitter for whateuer Com the function selector suitch is set.
4-40

Original lssue

MODEL

406

(rurplrrreo

pBocEDURES)

SPKR/OFF/HDST Receiver
Selector Switches - SELECT any
dividrrally or

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDLIRES

of the receiver audio signals incombination for simultaneous

in

monltrol1ng.
I{OTE

Set the ind,iuiduaL receiuer uolume controls at
th,eir final d,esired leueL onLy after establishing
the interphnne Leuel uith the nTdster controls. In
the euent that interphone is not being utilized,
set the indiuidunl receiuer uolume control's with
the mqster controls at the 2 o'clnck position.
4. Function Selector
Switch - AS REQUIRED. Select COM 1, 2, 3 or CABIN. The
transmitter sidetone audio will be heard in the headset or
sneaker for the appropriatelv selected transmitter. In dual
iirstallations, the sideione will only be heard bv pilot and
copilot when both audio control panels are set to the s€me
transmitter selection.

5. AUTO SPKR/HDST
Selector Switch - AS REQUIRED' Selects the appropriate receiver
audio or'transmitter sidetone for reception on the
headset or speaker' On dual installations, the pilot's control banel activates only the pilot's headset or speaker and the copi.lot's control panel
activat€s only the copilot's headset or speaker.

6. Marker Beacon
HTGHA'WMUTE switch

f:".*it,",t*"?;

i"#

l3.r'*l"i:

MUTE position is momentary and
mutes the marker beacon audio for
approximately 30 seconds.

otE

oThe marker beacon and' DME au.dio leuel is
ad.iustabl.e onLv Lhrouph the naster uolume controls, therefori, it is finportant to heep the mas'
ter controls within Lheir normaL operating range
of approrimately 2 o'cloch. * any indiuiduaL
c'ornfdrt adiustment to tahe care of ambient
uoice Leuel or uariations in headset tlpes (muff,
single receiuer, etc.)

aDo not operate the master uolume controls at
an extrernbly lou setting while turning up the
indiuidunl receiuer uoLume conlrols to an extremelv hieh selttne. This could result in distortion o7 NAV. CoNi and ADF audio as well as
low leuek of MKR and DME aud'io.
Original lssue

4-41

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

{AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

?. Cabin Communication - Cockpit communication with the cabin is
accomplished bv setting the function selec-

tor switch to CABIN position and actuat-

ing the hand-held microphone or boom or
oxyeen mask micronhone. When the cabin
wrifies to communicatc with the cockpit,
actuation of the cabin-mounted microphone key lights the CABIN CALL inilicator on thdaudio control panel to signal
the cockpit. When the function selector
switch is-set to CABIN, communication is
established between the cockpit and cabin.

4OO

AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER

1. OFF/VOL Control - ON; ADJUST to desired listcning level.
2. PRI Frequency Selectorc - SELECT desired operating frequency.
3. SEC Frequency Selectors - SELECT desired operating frequency.
4. 1-2 Selector Switch - 1 position.
l.olE

The 1-2 selector switch can be plnced tn th'e "2"
position for operatinn on secondary freErcncy.
The resel.ect larnp will fLash only when freqrrcnqt

sebctian is outside of operating range of the
receLDer.

5. ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Switch - SELECT speaker or phone po6. ADF Pushbutton - PUSH

IN

sition as desired.
and note rclative bearing on ADF

Indicator.

7.

IN and hold until indicator pointer
off indicated bearins at least 10 to 20

TEST Pushbutton - PUSH
slews

degrees.

that pointer returm to the same relative bearing as in step 1.
9. HDG Control - SET goniometer-indicator dial so that index indicates magnetic or true heading of airplane. Pointer indicates bearine to station.

8. Indicator Pointer - Observe

4-42

Original lssue

MODEL

406

1er*er-rrreo eRocEDURES)

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

NOTE

When switching stations, plaNe function pushbutton in the REC positian. Then, after statinn
has been selected, place lunction pushbutton in
the ADF Dosition to resume autornntic direction
find.er operation. This practice preuents the
bearing indicator from swinging bach and. forth
as freEnncy dial is rotated..
10. BFO Pushbutton - PUSH IN as required.
r|orE

A

1000-Hz tone is heard in the audio output
whcn CW signal (Morse Code) is tuned. in pioperry.

ELECTRIC ELEVATOR TRIM DISENGAGE CHECK

1. Operatc the electric trim switch in one direction and observe motion of the manual pitch trim wheel in the proper direction. While
perforrning the above test, nomentarily depress APIRIM DISC
switch and release. Observe that manual pitch trim wheel motion is
arrested and remains stopped when the disconnect switah is released and electric trim swilctr is actuat€d.
2. Repeat Step f. in the opposite direction.
3. Elevator Trim - SET for takeoff.

Original lssue

4-43

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

4OO

1AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

MARKER BEACON

1. LOIHI MKR Swit'ch - SELECT HI position for airwav flving or
LO Position for ILS aPProaches'
2. SPKR/OFF/HDST MKR Switch - SEIECT speaker or headset
auoro.

3. VOL (HDST OR SPKR) CONTROL - ADJUST volume level'
4. Marker Beacon rest switch - lcruA.rP
ftotE

"?""igffi""1}1i"#i};:

oThe marker beacon and, DME audin leuel is

adjustable only through the nrdster oolume contr6ls, thereforL, lt is irnportant to heep -the rnos'

ter control.s within thcir nnrmaL operat.tnS. rdweol approximately 2 o'cloch ! dny LndtDl-dual
c'omi6rt adiustment to tohe care of ambient
uoicb leuel or uoriations
singLe receiuer, etc.)

in headset types (muff,

ODo not operate the master uolume controk at
lou setttng while tur.ning up the
ii
"rtr"^bLy
uoLume controla to an exreceiuer
indiuidual
tremelv hish settine This could result in distor'
tion o7 NAV, COIrt and ADF sudio os uell as
Lou leuels of MKR and DME audio.
4OO

NAVIGATION/COMMUNICATIONS

Pretuning Active Nav/Com Frequencies:
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio level'
2.
^siil,elC-fons - FREQUENCY
MANUALLY ROTATE corresponding NAV or
COM frequencv selectors (press 25/50 pushbutton
as reouired to- select the desired third fractional
COM'digi$ until the desired freqlency. is shown in
the freqiency readout window' The display bli*s
ioi approxlmatety 8 sec-onds. indicating that the
selected frequency is ready tor storage ln memory'

1,2,3
3.
-' MEMORY
frequencv memory button as inifihdfu; I pnnss the active
ai""t"a Uv the illumiruited iiremory. bar'.The .displav
immediatily stops blinking. indicating that the new
ii"q""""v is stored in th6 active memory arrd displays thi new active frequency' The original active
frequencY is lost.

4-44

Original lssue

MODEL

406

lnverrrreo

PRocEDURES)

sEcTroN 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

In Memory.
1. COM OFF/VOL CONTROL - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio

Preselecting and Storing Nav/Com Frequencies
level.

2. FREQUENCY SELECTORS - MANUALLY ROTATE corresponding NAV or Com frequency

selectors (press 25/50 pushbutton as
required to select the desired third

fraitional COM digit) until the desired frequency is shown in the fiequency readout window. The display blinks for approxirrately 8 seconds, indicating that the selected
frequency is ready for storage in
3. MEMORY

4.

1. 2.

memorv'

3

Pushbuttons - PRESS the memory pushbutton of one of the NAV
or COM memories not in use. The display immediately stops blinking, and displays th-e irew frequency for 1 second to indicate that it is now stored
in the selected memory. The display then reverts to
indicating the active frequency.
Merrory 1, 2, 3 Pushbuttons - REPEAT STEPS 2 and 3 r,o smre

another frequency in the second
NAV or COM memory not in use.

IOTE

This presetting sequence for memory 2 or 3 does
not effect comrnunication and/or nauigation operation on the originaL actiue frequency.
Recalling a Stored Frequency:

1. MEMORY 1,2,3 Pushbuttons - SELECT ard PRESS the desired
NAV or COM memory button,
and observe the following:

a. Frequency in selected memory becomes the active frequency.
b. Frequency readout window indicates new active frequenoy.
c. Corresponding memory bar indicates selected memory.
Communication- Receiv-er-Tranimitter Operation
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON.
2. XMTR SEL Switch (on audio control panel) - SET

to

rtesired 400

NAv/COM.

3. SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Switches
(on audio control panel) - SET to desired mode.

Original lssue

4-45

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

4. coM Frequency serection

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

f,,t:tnf;l Sffl:i* T"ddift-^i.d'ff6tri

1. 2 or 3 pushbuiton to recall a preset
fiequency,- or by manually select'ing the
desired operating frequency using t}le

COM frequency selectors and

25/50

pushbutton.
M)TE

If

duat VHF cornrnunications systems are initatLed, improued cornmunication with the airplane on fhe ground may be obtained b-y usiryg
-the
VHF COM 2 which is connected to the
uertical fin antenna. Airframe masking of the
RF sisnals lrom the Inwer ft'tselage antenna ossociatid wtih the VHF COM 1 sometimes imp air s

ground

co

mmunication.

5. Vol control - Adjust to desired audio level'
6. SQ' Control - ROTATE counterclockwige

to

decrease background

noise as required.

?. Microphone Button:
a. To Transmit - PRESS;

speak into microphone'
RELEASE.
b. To Receive
OPeration:
Navigation
"COfr,f
OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON; adjust to desired audio level'
r.
Selectnr Switches
2.
-- SPEAKER/PHONE
(-on audio cbntrol panel) - Set to dested mode'

3.NAVFrequencyserectionirt:,?nllrl;:Jf
t""ftI"+tilf Eff8H"f ?
2'or 3 nushbutton to recall a preset
frequenci, or by using NAV frequency
selecf,or.

4. NAV VOL Control - ADJUST to desired audio level'
5. ID-VOX-T Switch:
a. To Identify Station - SET to ID to hear navigation station
identifier signal.
b. To Filter Out Station - SET to VOX to include frlter in audio
circuit.

4-46

Original lssue

MODEL

406

SECTION 4

NORIJAL PROCEOURES

(avpr-rrreo PRocEDURES)

6. ARC PUSH-TO/PULL-FROM Knob (if applicable);
a. To Use As Conventional OBS - PLACE in -center detent

and

select desired course.

Obtain Bearing TO VOR
b.
"' To
sLti"" - puSH ("1'nC/puSg-rO) krob to inner (Momentary
On) position.

olE

ARC larnp wilt iltuminate amber qhile the O4S
cira is m'ouing to center thc course- de-

"iirti
iTiion

potnter. Afler alignment has

been

achieoed'to reflect bearing TO VQR' -automdtlc

ra.dial cenlering uilL sutomattcally sryul

do.w:LA

causing the ARC lamp to 8o -out and the AftL,
hnob lo return to the center detent posrtton anq
function os a normal OBS
Obtain Continuous
c.
" To
B;"'tiliiRbM-Vbn St"tio" - PULL (ARC/PULL-FR) knob
to outer det€nt.
t{olE

ARC lamp witl illuminate amber: OBS, course
card, will turn to center the course deDlatlon
bearing
ioiiter uith a FROM flag to indicate
'from
VOR station. This $/stem .urtl co.ntrnuduy
'driDe to present the VOR radiaL the airplane ts
on untU'manually returned to the center detent
W the Pilot.

ti.iif,,"1tT;
?. AP/CPLD Annunciator Lisht -clIECK
,o) Jl'6ll
1000A IFCS is engaged), amber
light illuminated'
VOR Self-Test Operation:
1. COM OFF/VOL Control - TURN ON'
2. NAV Frequency Selector Switches - S.ELECT usable VOR station
slgnar'

0'

course-at course- index;,course deviation
pointer centers or deflects l9{9r-9gh!' $epending on
bearitts of signal; NAVAO-FROM indicator shows
TO or FROM.

3. OBS KNOB - SET for

Original lssue

4-47

SECTION 4
NORMAL PROCEDURES

(AMPLIFIED

PROCEDURES) MODEL 406

4. IDIVOX/T Switch - PRESS to T and HOLD at T; course deviation pointer centers, NAV/TO-FROM indicator shows FROM. AP/CPLD and XMIT
annunciators are illuminated and the COM
and NAV displavs show 188.88 with all mem-

ory bars illuminated.
displace course approximately 10o to either
side of 0" lwhile holding' iD/VOX/f). Course deviation pointer deflects full scale in direction corresponding to course displacement.

5. OBS Knob - TURN to

NOISE ABATEMENT
Increased emphasis

on improving the quality of our

environment

requires renewed effort on the part of all pilots to rninimize the effect of
airplane noise on the public.

We, as pilots, can demonstrate our concern for environmental improvement by application of the following suggested procedures, and
thereby tend to build public support for aviation:
1. Pilots operating airplanes under VFR over outdoor assemblies of
persons. recreational and park areas, and other noise-sensitive areas
should make every effort to fly not less than 2000 feet above the
surface, weather permitting, even though flight at a lower level may
be consistent with the provisions of government regulations.
2. During departure from or approach to an airport, climb after
takeofl anil descent for landine should be madi: so as to avoid
prolonged flight at low altitudi near noise-sensitive areas. Avoidance of noise-sensitive areas, if practical, is preferable to overflight
at relatively low altitudes.
NOTE

The preceding recommend,ed proced,ures do not
apply whe.re they uould conflic.t with Air.Traffic
Control cleqrances or instructions, or where, in
the pilot's jud.gment, an altitu.d.e of less than

2000 feet is necessary to ad,equately exercise his

duty to see and sooid. other airpl.anes.

The flyover noise level, established in compliance
maximum continuous power is 72.0 dB(A).

with FAR 36 at

No determination has been made bv the Federal Aviation Administration that the noise level of this airplane is, or should be, acceptable or

unacceptable for operation at, into, or out of any airport.

4-48

Original lssue

MODEL

406

SECTION 4

(rr',rpltrteoPRocEDUREs)

NORMAL PROCEDURES

PROCEDURES FOR PRACTICE DEMONSTRATION

oF

^^

vMcA

Enrine inoperative procedures should be practiced in anticipation of
This practice should be conducted at a safe altitude and
recovery
""-"ni.ig"".y'.
tt sr]arted at a safe speed of at least 115 KIAS-'beAs
.no"ia
lowered in
speed mav
;i;ilii; il eained wiLh practice, the starting ir:
conditions is
.*uii i""t"'.""t. until the feel of the airplane emergency
directional
is
reduced,
speed
ihe
as
il'"1liii"-*i. ii "itould be noted that
b""o-". more diffrcult. Emphasis should be placed on Stopping
"o"t-i
yaw angles bv Ihe'IMMEDIATE app-lication of rudder
ih;-iliiiJ ttc"
-tv"nankin"g
sliglitly away from the yaw. Practice should be
a
"ript"i"-*ti
(ti
coirective reaction is deveJoped and
instinctive
a"
i"-"ii"iila ""tiji
procedure is automatic and, (2) airspeed, altitude, -and
ittJ'"iit*ti"" 'maintained
easily while the airplane is being.pre.pared for
n"lai"i, i"ii be
expect
.
a climb. tf a failed engine's propeller is allowed to w-rndnr['
significantly
to
be
coordination
for
requir6d
deflection
;ia; f"; and
greater.

Practice Demonstlation ol

vMcA

1. Wing FlaPs - T.O.
2. Landing Gear - UP.
3. Power Levers - SET takeoff power'
4. Airspeed - VssE (98 KIAS) minimum'
5. Trim - SET for takeoff'
6. Instmctor Pilot:
a. Power Lever of Simulated Failed Engine - IDLE'
b. ProPeller Control Lever of
Sirnulated Failed Engine - FEATHER'
7. Airspeed - DECREASE at approximately 1 Knot per second until
reaching V""^ (rdd radial) oi stall warning, whichever
occurs first.
8. Heading - MAINTAIN .with rudder and 5 degrees bank towards
operatrve engue.

V."o is used in training and is not a limitation'

br*;i""r,i;;;;;pi-r*

ii.i"ing,

It

is^ recommended'

demonstrations, takeoffs and landings'

this aimlane should not be flown at a speed slower than

v ssE-

Under no circumstances should should Juce - demonstration be atti;;i;t;;;i1ha" ihe red radial 6ii'the airspeed indicator'

t"-iiii'"i'i

Original lssue

4-49

sEcTtoN 4
r.ronMAr

pnoceouaes

(AMpLTFTED

pRocEDURES) MODEL 406

Simulated Engine Failure in Takeoff Configuration
Wing Flaps - T.O.
Landing Gear - DOWN.
Power Levers - SET takeoff power.
Airspeed - 98 KIAS ininimum.
Trim - SET for takeoff.
Instructor Pilot:
a. Power Lever of simulated failed engine - 150 foot-pounds.
7. Aileron and Rudder - AS REQUIRED to maintain straight ahead
flight (3 to 4 degrees bank with 1/2 ball slip
into operative engine).
8. Power Levers - TAKEOFF POWER, (failed engine, simulated
takeoff power) .
9. Landing Gear - UP when rate-of-climb is positive.
10. Autofeather - MONITOR for proper actuation (simulated).
11. Climb to Clear Obstacles - 102 KIAS.
12. Refer to ENGINE FAILURE AFTER ROTATION checklist.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Simulated engine failure taleoff and landing practice is most safely
done with both propellers set at 1900 revolutions per minute and the
simulated failed engine set at 150 foot-pounds.

FUEL CONSERVATION
Operational maintenance and record-keeping techniques, taken togethir, can minimize wasted fuel, extend the use-ful range'of any airplane
and result in a significant reduction in general operating costs.

On preflight inspection, entrance doors, baggage doors, emergency
exits, cowl flaps and wing flaps should be checked for alignment. Any
one of these items not precisely aligned will create additional drag.
Good nechanical condition of the airplane and engines is very impor-

tant for efficient operation and therefoie, the best [se of fuel.-A ciean
exterior, especially on the wing leading edges, results in better fuel
economy.

Time spent on the ground in careful flight planning will avoid need-

less delays on the ground, unnecessary fuel stops and other conditions

that can be wasteful of time arrd fuel. Plan flight in a straight line

whenever possible and after takeoff, turn on course as soon as practical.

Take advantage of altitudes ard favorable winds, but balance the
ground speed benefits of high altitudes and winds asainst the extra time
consumed in climbing to reach best altitude, refer to Section 5, for Fuel
and Time Required Chart.
4-50

Original lssue

MODEL

406

SECTION 4

(er'aplrrteopRocEDuRES)

NORMAL PROCEDURES

Plan flishts with maximum occupancy; a little effort in coordinating
and schedrlling can provide many miles of travel with no additional use
of fuel by filling empty seats.
Plan arrival and departure times to avoid peak hours of operation at
airport. Substantial fuel can be saved by reducing the -time that the
airilane is operated on the ground. A call to the tower before slarting
i"du',t"a power and i short run-up before takeoff will all result
""fi""r,
in fuel savings.

In flight, use proper climb and trim techniques. r-aise the landing- gear
and wing -flaps as soon as,sat'ely practrcal and reter to becf,ron o' ror
rntoflnatron.
cruise Dertbrmance

When descending, stay high and avoid a far out descent' Descend at

uour

sesme;t indica6d speed with power reductions as appro-

Tit; ."a-.o" fot keeping th'e speed down is simplv because^ a speed
;;t"t"."-iru
a severe diaglncreaie gnd a consequent waste of energy'
i"".au."
".ut"a the landin[ gear and wir:g flaps on final approach as
b';t;.6;ai;s
lat€ a3 salely pracf,rcal.

Original lssue

4-51 (4-52 blank)

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

sEcroN

5
PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

INTRODUCTION
TECHNIQUE
SAMPLE FLIGHT
Airplane Configuration . .
Takeoff Airport Conditions
Cruise Conditions

LandingAirportConditions

5-3
5-3
5-7
5-7

.....

Sample Performance Limitations
Sample Calculations ... .

o-l
5-8

CHARTS AND GRAPHS
Figure

5-1 ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE TAKEOFF FLIGHT
..........5-6
PATH..
........5-17
5-2 AIRSPEED CALIBRATION
,.,....5.18
5-3 ALTIMETER CORRECTION
5-4 TEMPERATURE RISE DUE TO RAM RECOVERY . . . . 5.19
5-5 TEMPERATURE CONVERSION FROM
......5.20
FAHRENHEIT TO CELSIUS
5-6 ISA CONVERSION AND OPERATING
5-21
TEMPERATURE LIMITS
5.7 PRESSURE CONVERSION - INCHES OF
5-22
MERCURY TO MILLIBARS
5-23
5-8 STALL SPEEDS
5-24
^ - 5-e WIND COMPONENT . .
.

-

.

s-ro

5-25
MINIMUM ENGINE ToRQUE FoR TAKEoFF
TO
ACHIEVE
5-11 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS .,,.... 5-26
5-12 MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT AS PERMITTED
....5-28
BY FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED
BY
AS
DETERMINED
TAKEOFF
LIMIT
MAXIMUM
5-13
THE DEMONSTRATED BRAKE ENERGY LIMIT . . . . 5.31

5.14 TAKEOFF DISTANCE
5-15 ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE

Original lssue - 1 July 1986

.....5-32
.....5.40

5-1

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

Figure

5.16 CLIMB GRAD IENT AT V, - ONE
ENGINE

INOPERATIVE

,....,,...5-42

5-1? RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS -T.O.) ...
.....,..5-43
5.18 RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS - UP)(MAXIMUM CLIMB) .
........5-44
5-19 RATE-OF-CLIMB - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE .... 5.45
5-20 RATE-OF-CLIMB - BALKED LANDING CLIMB ...... 5-46
5-21 SERVICE CEILING - ONE ENGINE INOPERATIVE . . . 5-47
5-22 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM
.........5-48
CLIMB .
CRUISE
5-23 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB
.........5-49
CLIMB .
(1900
. . . . 5-50
POWER
RPM)
5-24 MAXTMUM CRUISE
(1800
. . . . 5-58
RPM)
POWER
5-25 MAXTMUM CRUISE
(1700
. . . . 5-66
POWER
RPM)
CRUISE
5-26 MAXIMUM
(T600
. . . . 5-74
POWER
RPM)
5.2? MAXIMUM CRUISE
CRUISE
PERFORMANCE
5-28 MAXIMUM RANGE
5-82

(1900 RPM)

5.29

MAXIMUM RANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE
(1600

RPM)

......5-90

5-30 MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER FUEL REQUIRED . . . . . . 5-98
........5-99
5-31 RANGE PROFILE
.. 5-1OO
5-32 ENDURANCE PROFILE
.......5-101
5-33 HOLDING TIME .
5-34 TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO DESCEND ....... 5.102
5-35 LANDING FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED . . . . 5.103
....5-104
5-36 LANDING DISTANCE

5-2

Original lssue - 1 July 1986

MODEL 406

sEcTloN 5
PERFORI\4ANCE

INTRODUCTION
Section 5 contains all the performance limitations and information
tud,*a to op"*te the airplani safely- and to-help you plan your flighk
in detail with reasonable accuracy' Sale and precse operalron oI Lne
t.quit". the pilot to be thoroughly familiar with and understand
"i-t"""
thi data an-d calculatibns of this section.

,
-t"

The data on these graphical and tabular -charts have bee-n com..piled
tesLsl with the airplane and engines in good condition,
irom actuat flieht
"pitot
techniques. Note that the cruise peiformance data
".itislt"t"s"
for wiid and/or navigational errors. Allowances for
no
A"to*"tt"u
--JErt"ti. takeoff, climb,
descent and 45 ninutes reserve at the- particl.t"tt.
the
6. c;"G power and altitude are provided in the mnge profile chart,
chart and the'maximum cruise [o*er fuel required

"nauia"""'p.oru
chatf,,

All oerformance, range and endurance charts are based on the use of
jet fuei with nominal fuel density of 6.70 pounds per gallon'
Refer to the following figures for operating weight limits:

1. Maximum Takeoff Weight To Achieve Takeoff Climb Requirements

2. Maximum Takeoff Weight As Permitted By The Field Length
Required

3. Maximun Takeoff Weight Limit As Deternined Bv The Demonstrat€d Bra}e EnergY Limit
4. Landing Field Length Required

TECHNIQUE
REGULATORY COMPLIANCE

,A

Information in this section is presentcd for the purpose of compliance
with the appropriate performance criteria and certification requirements
of SFAR 41.
STANDARD PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS

All nerformance in this manual is based on flight test data and the
followiirg conditions:
1. Power ratings include the installation, bleed

air aad

accessory

losses.

2. Full temperature accountability within the operational limits for
which th6 airplane is certified.

Original lssue

c-J

sEcroN

5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

NOTE

ShouLd aLtitude be below the lowest altltude
shown on the performance charts, use the performance at the Loutest ualue shown.

3. Wing flap positions

as follows:

MODE

FLAP HANDLE POSITION

FLAP ANGLE

T.0.

100

TAKEOFF
ENROUTE
APPROACH
LANDING

0'

UP

20.
30"

LAND

4. All takeoff and landing performance is based on a paved, dry
runway.

5. The takeoff performance was obtainied using the following procedures and conditions:

Accelerate Go/Takeoff Flight Path
a. The autofeather was armed.
b. Two engine power was set static to the setting corresponding to
fisure 5:10 and then the brakes were released. Power was reset
aJ required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded 1350 foot-pounds.

c. The engine has failed just prior to Vr in that the pilot

d.

nized the failure at Vy.
At Vu, the airplane was rotated

to

Tonose up

recog-

pitch attitude and

heading with the
wings level until reaching 400 feet.
e. The landing gear was retracted when a positive climb rate was

f.
g.

-

ruddii

was aiplied as required

to maintain

established.
V2 was maintained from the 50 lbot point above the runway to
400 feet above ground level (AGL). Power adjustments were not
made from 80 KIAS until reaching 400 feet AGL.
The aimlane was then accelerated to Vyss at which time the
flaps were retracted and the throttle was adjusted to torque or
ITT lirnit. The airplane was trimmed and 3o bank was established with an apbroximate 1/2 ball slip into the operative
ensine indicated on the turn and bank indicator. The climb was
then continued to 1000 feet AGL.

Accelerate Stop (Refer to Figure 5-12)
a. The autofeather was armed
b. Two engine power was set static to the setting corresponding to
fisure 5:10 and then the brakes were released. Power was reset
aJ required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded 1350 foot-pounds.

c. The engine has failed just prior to V1 in that the pilot

recog-

nized the failure at V1.

c-+

1 June 1987

SECTION 5
PERFORI,,IANCE

MODEL 406

d. Both power levers were brought to flight idle ai Vr.
e. Maximum effective braking was started immediately after the
power levers were brought to flight idle and continued until the
airplane came to a stop.
TIOTE

Maximum up eLeuator, uithout allowing the air
pLane to become airborne, aLLows maximum
brahing eff ectiuene s s.
Multiengine Takeoff
a, The autofeather was armed

b. The power was set prior to brake release to the setting corresponding to figure 5-10 and then the brakes were released.
Power was reset as required prior to 80 KIAS if it exceeded
1350 foot-pounds.

c. Positive rotation was made at Vp, increasing the pitch attitude
by Toand achieving the 50 foot obstacle speed given in Figure
5- 14.

d, The landing

gear was retracted when a positive rate of climb

was established.

Landing

Landing was preceded by a steady three degree angle of approach down to the 50 foot height with airspeed at Vqs6 wiih
flaps in the landing position and the landing gear was extended.
b. Power was adjusted as required to maintain the three degree
approach angle at Vpse at 50 foot point.
c. At 50 feet, a gradual power reduction was initiated.
d. Sink was slightly arrested, the power levers were fully retarded
lo flighl idle and a firm touchdown was accomplished. The
power Jevers remained at flight idle until the airplane had
a.

stopped.

Maximum effective braking was initiated immediately and continued throughout the landlng roll.
I. The control wheel was held full aft to keep all the weight on
the main wheels.

e.

1 June 1987

5-51

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

-TAKEOFF

MODEL 406

,/T

POWER SET
:TAKEOFF POWER ADJUSTED

POWER SET

YI
_

tl

I

1000 FEET

FEET

I

Figure 6-1
One Engine Inoperative Takeoff Flight Path

c-o

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

SAMPLE FLIGHT
The following is an example of a typical flight using the performance
data contained in Figures 5-8 through 5-36. The approximation method
is used in tabular performalce except where noted.
AIRPLAI,..iE CONFIGURATION

Airplane Ramp Weight .
Airplane Weight at Takeoff
Usable Fuel Load . . .

^

.
.....

....

.
.

9075 Pounds
9000 Pounds
2000 Pounds

TAKEoFF AIRPoRT coNDtnoNs

Length
Temperature
Field

Field Pressure Altitude
Wind . . .

7200 Feet (Runway 23)
Degrees Celsius

......16

.
.

Obstacles

-..

.270

....

2400Feet

at 25 Knots

degrees

....

None

CRUISE CONDITIONS

Distarce
Cruise Altitude
Temperature
Wind...
Power . .

600 Nautical Miles
. . 10,000 Feet
-15 degrees Celsius (ISA -10 Degrees Celsius)
15 Knot Tailwind

..

Maximurn Recommended Cruise Power

LANDING AIRPORT CONOITIONS

_

Field kngth
Temperature .....
Field Pressure Altitude
Wind . . .
Landing Weight

.

.

.

.. ..

Obstacles

4000 Feet (Runway 19)
TDegrees Celsius

....

270 Degrees

1?00Feet

At

1? Knots

.... To Be Calculated
..... 50-Foot Trees

SAMPLE PERFORMANCE LIMITATIONS

(1) Minimum Engine Torque For Takeoff
(Refer to example on Figure 5-10) - 1350 Foot-Pounds
(2) Maximum Takeoff Weight To Achieve Takeoff Climb Requrrements
(Refer to example on Figure 5-11)

Original lssue

-

9360 Pounds

5-7

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

(3) Maximum Takeoff Weight As Permitted By The Field
Length Required
(Refer to eiample on Figure 5-12)
available field length

-

Not weight limited bv

(4) Maximum Takeoff Weight As Determined Bv The
onstrated Brake Enercv Limits
(Refer to example on"- Figure 5-13 Example

1) -

DemAbove

9360 Pounds

(5)
Lensth Required
- Landine[oField
example"on Fi$rre 5-36)
tn"fe"

-

3900 feet

with wind

cor"rection

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

Wind Component (Figure 5-9)
(1) The angle between the runway and the prevailing wind is
40 degrees.

(2) Enter Figure 5-9 on the 40 degrees wind line and proceed
out to th; intersection with the 25-knot arc'
(3) Read horizontally left from this intersection; the headwind
component is 19 knots.

Takeoff Distance (Figure 5'14)
(1)
Fizure 5-14 at 9360 pounds weight; the 50-foot ob' Enter
stacle sDe;d is 102 KIAS.
(2) Proceed horizontally right from 3000-foot- pressure altitude

'-'

columns"for 20 degrees Cels:ius The takeoff
ltt"
is 2588 feet and the total distance reqrired to
*o""a """ti"ut

to

iiear a ^"
50-foot obstacle is 3164 feet without wind correcthe correct€d
ii;;. witi-t ; 1g-knot headwind compon-ent,corrected
total
Gfeoff gtound run is 2365 feet and the
distance required is 2892 feet.
19 knots

lrea4wind
l0 knots headwrnd

Corrected takeoff

iround

5-d

run

:
:
:

(4.b percent)

:8.6

percent

2588 feet

- [8.6 percent (2588 feet)]

2588 feet

-

1223 teet\

2365 feet

Original lssue

MODEL 406

"ERFsoE"cJlotl[E

Corrected total
distance required

:3164 feet - [8.6 percent

:
:

3164 feet

-

1272

(3164 feet)l

teetl

2892 feet

Accelerate Stop Distance (Figure 5-12)
(1) Enter Figue 5-12

2400 feet altitude and 16 degrees

at

Celsius.

(2)
horizontally to right to weight refere-nce.line Move
' Proceed
down weight line fo 9000 pounds. -Proceed horizontally to
rieht to wlnd reference line. Proceed down headwind line to
19 knots wind component.

(3)

Proceed horizontally to right to weig,ht line. The accelerate-

stop distance required is 3970 feet.

Accelerate Go Distance (Figure 5'15)
(1) Enter Figure 5-15 at 9360 pounds weight; rotation

(2)
'

speed is

98 KIAS.
Proceed horizontally right from 3000-foot lresgYre altitude
to the vertical columns-for 20 degrees Celsius' The distance

reouired to clear a 50-foot obstacle, after rotating at 98
KIAS, is 5652 feet without wind correction. With- a 19-knot
headwind component, the distance can be reduced by:

lg knots L-^r--.:-r
,=____=__i:s:I++
lu knols neaowrno
Corrected accelerate
go

distance

:5652

:

:

9.5 percent

feet - [9 5 percent (5652 feet)]

5652 feet

:5115

(b percent)

- [537 feet]

feet

M)TE

ol the acceLerate go disLonce.
can be obtalned using the ,nterpoLatrcn method
if the distance required' ualue from the approxiA more eaact ualue

mation method is too

Original lssue

Larae.

5-V

sEcloN

5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

Rate-ot-Climb - All Engines Operating (Figures 5-17 and 5-18)
(1) Enter Figure 5-18 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the reference line. Follow the
slope of the adjacent rat€-of-climb lines until intersecting
the vertical 9000-pound line.

(4) Proceed horizontally right to obtain rate-of-climb.

(1600

Feet per minute)

(5) The climb

speed for all conditions is

-

109 KIAS.

Rate-Of-Climb - One Engine Inoperative (Figure 5-19)

'

(1) Enter Figure 5-19 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the reference line. Follow the
slope of the adjacent rate-of-climb lines until intersecting
the vertical 9000-pound line.

(4) Proceed horizontally right to obtain rate-of-climb. (410 feet
per mrnule,

(5) The climb

speed

is 108 KIAS.

Time, Fuel And Distance To Climb - Cruise Climb (Figure 5-23)

Time, fuel and distance to climb are determined by frnding the
difference between the airport and the cmise conditions; thus, two
calculations are required, one for the airport condition and the second
for the cruise condition.
Airport Condition:
(1) Enter Figure 5-23 at 16 degrees Celsius.
(2) Proceed vertically up to 2400-foot pressure altitude line.
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the 9000-pound line.
(4) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to climb (1.4 minutes), fuel to climb (20 pounds) and distance io climb (3
nautical miles).

5-10

Original lssue

SECTION 5
PEBFORMANCE

MODEL 406
Cruise Condition:

(5) Enter Figure 5-23 at -15 degrees Celsius.
(6) Proceed vertically up to 10,000-foot pressure altitude line.
(?) Proceed horizontally right to the 9000-pound line.
(8)
verticallv down to obtain time to climb (5.9 min' Proceed
utes), tuel to cliirb (6? pounds) and distance to climb (15
nautical miles).

Final calculations:
Time to climb

:

Cruise time to climb -

:

5.9 minut€s

:4.5
Fuel to

climb

Distance to

climb

atport time to

climb

:
:
:
:

- 1.4 minutes

minutes

Cruise fuel to climb - airport fuel to climb
67 Pounds - 20 Pounds
4? pounds (add ?5 pounds for star{, taxi
and takeofO (122 Pbunds total)
Cruise distance to

clinb - airport

distance

to climb

:
:

15 nautical miles - 3 nautical mileg
12 nautical miles

Adjusted for wind (use 60 percent of the
wind at altitude for climb wind),

:

:
:
-

a wind contribution
m+gt€s (0.6 x 15 knots)l
rz + |- 4lq
ttu mrnur€s

12 nautical miles

12 nautical miles

*

0.7 nautical miles

12.7 nautical miles

Time, Fuel And Distance To Descend (Figure 5-34)
Time. fuel and distance to descend are determined by finding the
difference between the cruise and the landing airport conditions; thus
two calculations are required, one for the cruise condition and the second
for the landing airport condition.

Original lssue

5-11

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

Cruise Condition:
(1) Enter Figure 5-34 at the cruise altitude of 10,000 feet.
(2) Proceed horizontally right to the guideline.
(3) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to descend (13.3
minutes), fuel to descend (99 pounds) and distance to descend (43 nautical miles).

Landing Airport Conditionr
(4) Enter Figure 5-34 at the airport altitude of 1700 feet.
(5) Proceed horizontally right to the guideline.
(6) Proceed vertically down to obtain time to descend (2.0
minutes), fuel to descend (19 pounds) and distance to descend (7.0 nautical miles).

Finai Calculations:
Time to

descend :

Cruise time to descend - airport time to
descend

Fuel to

descend

:
:
:

13.3 minutes

- 2.0 minutes

11.3 minutes

Cruise fuel to descend - airport fuel to
descend

:
:
Distance to descend :
:
:

99 pounds

-

19 Pounds

80 Pounds

Cruise distance to descend - airport
distance to descend.
43 nautical miles - 7 nautical miles
36 nautical miles

Adjusted for wind (use 40 percent of the
wind at altitude for descent wind),

:
:

36 + wind contribution

(0.4 x 15 knoLs)l
+ t- lljltit minutes
mr.nutes
:36 nautical miles * 1.1 nautical miles
: 37.1 nautical miles

5-12

96

Original lssue

sEcTloN 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

Maximum Recommended Cruise Power (Figure 5'24)
The approximation method for extracling. dala from the cruise tables
temperature and altitude values, which are
generally conservative with respect to fuel economy.
(1) Enter the ISA -10 desrees Celsius data for Maximum Rec' ommended Cruise Pdwer (1900 RPM) at an altitude of

is to seli,it the next lower

10,000 feet.

(2) Use the higher weight of 9360 pounds. The airspeed is
KTAS and the total fuel flow is 605 pounds per hour.

232

(3) Correcting for a weight of 9000 pounds, the airspeed increaseg to:

. -' i KTAS ut - KTAS atl
lower higher
rubu pounos
I| |I weight werght ll:
weight L
232 KTAS -[9!9q!9g$::-999q-p9qd" I lzes xres - 232 KrAS] :
l0tt0 Pounds
I
L

at .. . .
the higher +l(hrgher
Airsneed

232

KTAS +

0.3

wqlg-hJ

.

- rhglt werght

KTAS :232.3 KTAS

method may be used for interpolating altitude and
The intemolation
-to
obtain performance data closer to the actual conditions.

temperature

In the above calculations, for convenience, the weight was assuned to
be eoual to the takeoff weight of 9000 pounds. More realistic data can be
detenmined if the average cruise weight is used. This average cruise
weight is determined as follows:
Cruise

fuel

-

Total - climb - descent
distance distance distance

true t

airspeed

wind
correction

x [total fuel flow per hour]

37.1
12.0
600
- nautical - nautical
miles rniles miles
232.4 KTAS * 15 knot tailwind

Nautical

x [605 pounds per hour]

- 550'9-ngutigal miles x 605 oounds per hour

:
:

247.4 knots

2.23 hours x 605 pounds per hour
1349 pounds

Original lssue

5-13

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

Average

crurse:

weight

Starting weight - start, taxi and climb fuel

-

Cruise
fuel
2

:90?5
:8279

pounds

-

122 pounds

founds

-

l34glounds
2

Average

cruse

speed : True airspeed (refer to Figure 5-30) t weight correction
: 282 KTAS * 9360 pour.rd-s_- 8279pounds (233 _ 282 KTAS)

:
:

1060 pounds

232 KTAS

+

1.0 KTAS

233 KTAS

Average

ground

speed :

233

KTAS

*

tailwind

:

233

KTAS

+

15 knots

:248 knots
Distance

durins

cruisd : Total distance
:600-12-37.1

:

- climb distance - descent distance

550.9 nautical miles

Time

during

cruise distance
ground speed

:550.9

:

5-14

248
2.22 hours

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

Landing Distance (Figure 5'36)
Landing weight

:

Startine weieht - st€rt, taxi and climb
fuel - cirise fuel - descent fuel

:90?5

pounds

1349 pounds

:

-

122 Pounds 80 Pounds

7524 pounds

:210

decrees at 17 knots. Determrne
headwiird compon€nt (refer to Figure 5-9)
(16 knols headwind)

Wind

Enter Fizure 5-36 at 8300 pounds; the approach. speed is 100 IAS'
p.i"""a' ft--"ir"tt"tiy .iint fro"i 2000-foot pressure. altitude to the vertii;i;;1il; f- io ii"giee. Celsius. The lai'rding distan^ce- ground roll is

f""'f-i,tia- ttte totil distance required to clear a 5-0-foot obstacle is
comp-onent,
iofs f""t ;ithout wind correction' With a 16-knot headwind
;i;"";;;"fi- ct;urra ioii aitt"tt"" is 1311 feet and the conected total

iizs

distance required is 2446 feet.

16 knots

l0Tiok
Conected landing

g."""a

i"U

:

hea4wln4 {5 Dercent) :g.0 percent
headwin

7425 feet

- [8.0 percent (1425)]

1425 feet

- 114 feet

:1311
Corrected total
distance required

:

feet

2659 - [8.0 percent (2659)]

:2659 feet - 213 feet

:

2446 feet

Rate-Ot-Climb - Balked Landing Climb (Figute 5-20)

(1) Enter Figure 5-20 at 7 degrees Celsius.
(Z; e.oceed vertically up to the 1700-foot pressure altitude line'
(3) Proceed horizontally right to the weight reference line'
Follow the zuidelines up and to the ri8ht untll rnterslecf,rng
-?524-pound weight line.
the vertical
(4) Proceed horizontally right to determine the rate-of-climb'
(1600 feet per minute)

Climb speed :100 KIAS for all weights and altitudes.
Original lssue

5-15

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

'r,^rot fi,ot rod,lir-n
(without holding fuel)

:
:
:

Start, taxi and climb fuel
-r cruise fuel * descent fuel
122 pounds -F 1349 pounds

*

80 pounds

1551 pounds

Holding Time (Figure 5-33)
The holding fuel required for 45 minutes at 10,000 feet is as follows:

(1) Enter Figure 5-33 at 0.75 hours.
(2) Proceed horizontally right to the altitude guideline of
10,000 feet.

(3) Proceed vertically downward
required (226 pounds;.

Total fuel required
(with 45 minutes
holding

fuel)

:
:
:

to obtain the

holding fuel

Total tuel required without holding tuel
* holding fuel required for 45 minutes.
1551 pounds

*

226 pounds

1777 pounds

, ,To determine holding time, the fuel available for

holding must be

oelermlneo.

Fuel
available

for

holding

:
:
:

Initial fuel ' start, taxi and climb
fuel - cruise fuel - descent fuel
2000 pounds - 122 pounds
1349 pounds - 80 pounds
449 pounds

(1) Enter Figure 5-33 at 449 pounds of fuel available.
(2) Proceed vertically up to the intersection with the guideline
for 10,000 feet.
(3) Proceed horizontally left to obtain holding time available.
(1.5 hours)

5-16

Original lssue

MODEL

SECTION 5
PERFoRMANoE

406

NOTE:

1.

2.

lndicated Airspeed Assumes
Zero Instrumeni Elror.
The Following Calibrations
Are Not valid ln Prestall
Bullet.

FLIGHT CALIBRATION
GEAR . UP
FLAPS . UP
KIAS

GEAR

.

UP or DOWN

FLAPS . T.O.

KCAS

GEAR . DOWN
FLAPS - APPR

GEAR . DOWN
FLAPS . LAND

KtAS

KCAS

KIAS

KCAS

KtAS

82
92

82

1t1

80
90
100
110

100
110

80
90
100
110
120

roo

tiz

110

112

80
90
100
'| 10

120

121

120

121

120

120

140
160
180

141
161
181

141

140
160
180

200
220

201

140
160
180
200

139
158
178
198

229

230

101

't

61

181
201

200

91

140
160
1-80

KCAS
80

90
99
109

118
137
157

,!:

221

EXAMPLE:

Indicated Airspeed - 204 KIAS
Landing Gea. - Up
Flaps - Up
Calibrated Airspeed

'

205 KCAS

GROUND CALIBRATION
FLAPS . T,O.
KIAS

KCAS

60
70
80
90
100

63
73

'110

83

92

102
112

Figure 5-2
AIRSPEDD CALIBRATION
PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S SYSTEMS

Original lssue

5-17

SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE

MODEL 406

NOTE:

1. lndicated airspeed and indicated altitude assume zero inskument elror'
2. Add co(eclion to indicated altlmeter reading to oblain corrected allitude
3. The following calibrations are valid lor the oilols and copilot s altimelsrs
'I5,0(X) FEET

SEA LEVEL

GEAR
FLAPS

UP
UP

DOWt{
T.O.

DOWN
APPR

KIAS

FEET

FFFT

FEET

14
13

'11

13

-2

80
90
100
110
120
140
160
180
200

220

6

DOWN

LAND

13
15

17
19

17
19

00wN
APPR

DOWN
LANO

FEET

FEET

FEET

23
20

17
10

26

20

-3

24

19
19

-14

1

-4
-10

't5

15

DOWN
T.O.

UP
UP

-9

-22

-18

-33
'41

10

-37

2
-6
-16

-6
-34

-28

20

20

23

23

42

-65

26

26

-50

29

29

":

21

34

229
3O,OOO FEET

DOWN
APPR

0owtl

T.O.

KIAS

I'EEI

I'EEI

FEET

80

38

n

90

34

17

-11

-23

GEAR
FLAPS

UP
UP

00wN

LAND

4

100
110
120

43
40

34

-26

32

35

32

-45
-58

140
160
180
200

34
39

u
39

44

44
50

50

-47

-88

-70
-84
-99

-109

-.

220
229

58

EXAMPLE :
Aksoeed - 160 KIAS.
lndicated Altitude - 12,000 Feel
Conliguration ' Gear Up And Flaps Up.

3pi;1;fr,t"5ff1i2

000 Feet

+ (2r) Feer

'

12,02r Fe€t.

Fieure 6-3
ALTIMETE_R CORRECTION
PILOT'S AND COPILOT'S SYSTEMS

5-18

Original lssue

sEcloN 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

5

s

=o
G

9T'o
o
6
4

6lo-

c

.

' 3slu 3un1vu3dw3r

Figure 5-4
TEMPERATURE RISE DUE TO RAM RECOVERY
Original

lssue

5-19

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

.l

a
o
I R^
a o
E

D8

,jj h

E
E
F

Figure 5-6
TEMPERATURD CONVERSION FROM FAHRENHEIT TO
CELSIUS
5-20

Original lssue

SECTION 5

PERFORMI\NCE

H

^U"^
E
F
UJ

Brs

0

-70 -60 -50 40 -30 -20 -10 0

10

OUTSIDE AIB TEMPERATURE.

20

'C

EXAMPLE:

Temoerature - 16 oeorees Celsius.
Pros;ure Allitude - 2{00 Feet.
Temperature

'

ISA +5 degrees Celsius.

Figure 6-6
ISA CONVERSION
AND OPERATING TEMPERATURE LIMITS
Original

lssue

5'21

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE
1050

1040

1030

1020

co

=

1010

FF
FF
1000 FF
FF
TT
eeo FlFF
FF
s80
FF

tr
tr
11.

e70 FF

e6o FF

tr
r-r

950

El

a.00

28.00

29.50

30.00

PBESSUBE . INCHES OF MERCURY

EXAMPLE:

Pressure - 29.55 Inches

ol M€rcury.

Pressure - 1000.6 Millibars.

Figure 5-7
PRESSURE CONVERSION
INCIIES OF MERCURY TO MILLIBARS

5-22

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

CONDITIONS:
1.

Power Levers - Flight

PERFORMANCE

ldle.

NoTE:

1.

2.

l\,laximum altitude loss during a conventional stall

is 520 leet.
Maximum nose down pitch attitude and altitude loss
dunng recovgry from one engine inoperative stall per
FAB 23.205 are approximalely 7 degrees below the
horizon and 700 feet, respectively.
ANGLE.OF.EAI{K

WEIGHT
POUI{DS

9360

CONFIGURATION

0"
FLAPS

GEAR

UP
T.O.
APPR

UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN

LAND
8300

UP

T.O.
APPR
LAND
7300

UP
T.O.
APPR

LAND
6300

UP

T.O.
APPR.
LAND,

UP
OOWN
DOWN
DOWN

KIAS

45'

30"

60"

KCAS

KIAS

KCAS

KIAS

KCAS

KIAS

KCAS

'fi3

134

134
120

95

102

102

113

85

85

91

91

101

81

81

87

87

77

81

83

96
90

96
92

90
82
79
76

97

97
88
85
82

107

90
82
7q
74

UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN

86
78
77

UP
DOWN
DOWN
DOWN

81

74
72

88
85
80

98
94
88

't

01

120
115
107

115
109

107
98
94

127

127

116

1't6

112

112

90

105

107

86
78

92

92

102

'102

122

122

84

84

93

'|

77

83

83

79

8l

92
89

109

75

93
92
87

110
109
106

81

87

87

96

96

115

'|

75

81

81

74
74

80

80

88

106
105

78

80

6D

89
88
88

106
105
105

10

104

103

15

EXAMPLE:

Weight - 9000 Pounds.
Landinq Gear " LJp.
Wing Flaps - Up.
Angle-of-Bank - 15 Degrees.
Slall Speed - 96 KIAS.
Stall Speed - 96 KCAS.

Figure 6-8
STALL SPEEDS

Original lssue

5-23

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE
NOTE

Demonstruted Crosswind Ve\ocity
(not a limttation).

is 20

hnots

F

o
z

;
iru
z)
(r
o
F
E
J'O
F

zl!
z

o
(L

:'o

ta

(.)

o

z

t

-10 --- - 01020304050

WIND COMPONENT PERPENDICULAR TO RUNWAY - KNOTS
55857021

-

EXAMPLE:
Wind Velocity - 25 Knots At An Angle Ol 40 Degrees'
Headwrnd Componeni

- 19 Knols

crosswind Component - 16 Knots

Ficure 6-0
WIND COMPONENT

J-21

Original lssue

SECTION 5
PERFOBMANCE

MODEL 406
19OO RPM
CONDITIONS:

1.

2.
3.

NOTESI

Airspeed - 0 to 80 KIAS.
Inenial Separators - Normal.
Heater - As Noted.

1

.

2.
3.

4.

----

Above 80 KIAS allow torqu€ to increase not to
exceed 1382 foot-pounds or ITT limit
The torque indicaled below is the minimum value
for which takeoff performance in this section
can be obtained.
Forque on this chart shall be achieved without
exceeding 725 degrees Celsius ITT or 101.690 No.
For op€raton with inerl8l separator in byoass, aAd
5 degr€es Celsius to the actual oulsrds dii
temperature before entering graph.

Heater - ON
' OFF

Heater

-

'14

zo

-

+13
F

o
o

'12

o
tc

o.
Flo

z
z

=

-20 -10 0

10 20 30 40

50

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE. "C

EXAMPLE:

Oulsrde Air Temperature - l6 Deqre€s Celstus.
Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feet.
Minimum Engine Torque Acceptabte Durjng cround Run - 1350 Foot_pounds.

Figure 5-10
MINIMUM ENGINE TORQUE FOR TAKEOFF
Original lssue

5-25

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

INERTIAL SEPARATORS - NORMAL
NOTE:

1.

----

Use dashed lines fol takeofJ with heater on.

Heater - ON
Heatgr - OFF

-

z

-

80,

F
!

g
=
7s6

ut

l.^

=

|," =i

t>

+o -ro o

10 20 30 40

OUTSIDE AtR TEMPERATURE

50

- 'C

EXAMPLE:

Heater - Oft.
Outside Air lemperature - 16 oegrees Celsius
Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feet.
Maximum Taheotf weighl - 9360 Pounds.

Ficrure 5-ll (Sheet I' of 2)
MAXIMUM fNTNONN WEIGHT TO ACHIEVE
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS

5-26

Original lssue

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406
INERTIAL SEPARATORS

.

BYPASS

853

zf,

80

,'

t

Iul

3
75ts

70{=

-30 -20 -10 0

lo 20

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

-J--r-J--L.r!_J_r.r_I 60

30

. 'C

,o 50

60
60856039

Figure 5-11 (Sheet 2 of 2)
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEICHT TO ACIIIEVE
TAKEOFF CLIMB REQUIREMENTS

Original lssue

c-zl

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

rffl

0001 F@

ofulnoSu HreNf-] 0-llll

;

R

fR Z^^

r- =dz
- >Y

9I

FI
dl

o
()

!

5

o

v

€
o)
J

6Z
N=)

.=
E

b:

o

8F
=

e9
op

!c
=

o
z

.9

o
cc
o
F

a3

9< F
..e

t
o-

lu o
oz
J

sF
E,
uJ

z

c
5
5

s,)

ea
.ry9>
*-a

u.l

-e
N

E

l

-

doe > F
>9E {, t;

3e Fq€Eij E
e9 -T;Y Pa
q eE aE a.a€

Ee

6;vt
OPP
(oin.
-r^o

I 3*3
S

Ao E6

z 9{;I geE "i€
9 3* ";.96 Ei
6() E_a H', ;.9
t
- E-=
6iri+o@
zo ,j
="sts

ztL

oo

tl

lt

Figure 6-12 (Sheet I of 2)
MAXIMUM rrxnoFr wErcHT AS PEEMTTTED
BY FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED
(ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE)

5-28

Original lssue

SECTION 5

l33l

PERFORMANCE

000t -

6lurnolu

H1eN3-l 0-]]E
F

z

lR za99
6il
H. =d>
->!.
H- o

I
e

Co

-9

O

8

P.>
o

.E

E

^ E;
o
;o
<
;€
.-. Y E.E
ao
ez
g) €o

PF
tl.t

=

cb

,

t9H
a6
-

;:

"9E
Eg
z.
ae!

>
dl

EE
E€

' ..e
o
r^EE
Gni

o>
F

!JO

tz

a

E

^a

o-a

o .q
o
".!

HF+Tffi

(E Eo= >. I

;ifi+#F+ffifF;]
6 ^
le

IJJ

oo

d#e
ffiffi
tr ss; E i

.-.2:EU;;.1
E5g?_a
;gE
lq
.!:g:SB€
I:
eflcr.iEEg ;9:
E € 3lE
-.^

=
T€F:rs
fEfata*ss 3 - e"glg
,s 6ts |5-

-;SEiiriilJ

=

=E

Fn: F'- 5,
.-"r- =;s
i'=$:':siEEe
iSEF-sdg lef
Ud
|

- Figure 6-12 (Sheet 2 of 2)
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT AS PERMITTED
BY FIELD LENGTII REQUIRED
(ACCELERATE STOP DISTANCE)

Original lssue

5-29 (5-30 blank)
SFAR 41

MODEL 406

sEcTroN 5
PERFORMANCE

CONDITIONS:

1.
2.

3.

Wing Flaps - T.0.
Ground ldle and Maximum Effective Braking at Vl
Level, Hard Surface, Dry Runway.
50
40

930

tt

20

F

< r^
E'w

>n
T-to
2-zo
tr

o

-30
-40
-50

iiz

o.
ca!

z=
l|',
f

-t
EXA[,{PLEi

1.

Pressure Altitude - 2400 Feel.
Outside Air Temperature - 16 Deqrees Cetsrus.
Wrnd - 19 Knot Headwind Compo-nent.
Brake Energy Takeofl Weight Limit - Above 9360 pounds.
CIhe Limding Wnd For Thrs Example ts 5 5 Knots Taitwind.)

2.

Pressure Aliitude - 12,000 Feet.
Outside Air Temperature - 0 Deqrees Cetsius.
Wind - 5 Knot Tailwind Comoon;nr.
Brake Energy Takeoff Weight Limit - 7000 Pounds.

Fieure 5-13
MAXIMUM TAKEOFF WEIGHT LIMIT AS DETERMINED
BY THE DEMONSTRATED BRAKE ENERGY LIMIT
Original lssue

5-31

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE
.g

E6
o9

58
!

sEgEan

J>

i;E

E

a'.9

a

E o=
E;; E

EdF

Ecdii

iiSE.B.

PbeP

+[sa
gP 3;5
Fi6 b

EE F?

: gaFa

sEgEas

a
.9

aPals

=iE
EEH

E

is

sEgEEe

€=
==
3=

T

E:;

:9e=

H3E?A
o q = 9."

EE€E$
P-ci<"j
z

e;s

=I
49

5U

gEEEan

'?ii
No

e;e
Pd,

.E i.

Ft'F

5eF

,

ie gE

s3i
<"9 A,P9 E EE
Ei3 -t
-:E o

.=

@E

E

3>
r-€

6
5 E:5

a

=

a 2;
gi, E
-iE E X
=
;_i6i.E
.",
6*

='

a*gFa
t5 45

!e

Ee
o- ga

>e

,

EeH*

E E1H

>=

:sr: E.q

EE

gE

6
2?
o

u:i

=r o

lsgr
t=ts

t*x
.:
3E:E

ittii

90!!
o

itt!i

sggEEu

t-6x
Z'.E

rt!rl

EEH

gbrag

9Y(5
FEaE
*EE-E
q :;

o

rHsEsn

=.9

6*=.e
Xo

H

F--

c;F

oq=c).?
8!5 E8
H-ciaj
z

*
OEE
F;
:

Prn

5Qr-

;

I-gFE
r.d s z;
'-

oi

s,E.€

aifr
Ei

i

F5sE3F€

pEssigEe
z-

i^^^^
Y5-55

' il

EE

h9F.?OE,9

a-

E

No*ra)@

f;EH=

>*
:- tt,
?52

gF

Figure 6-14 (Sheet 2 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Original lssue

5-33

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORI,IANCE

g

o

oP

6n

rEgHan
Z\E

e !x

oolu

Ep;€
.s:; E
rEgEan
<-96
ii3q.

;3Et
;P8.[E:3

2",

b!
EKEb

rH:Eae

a=H

En*

a6bsa

a&

Eaa

rgqE
eu

(J

b8:aa

EE E€

E-;i
.:
Y'E

aR5$S

F

HsE=e

EdF

EE=€$
P;6i
z

aj

ragEAn

5

E;F

-E
E3
.E4 ;

5Qrut=u

>H I
e9
o?; :,

E

Ei

RKRHS

9S36b RA$S5
HE=EF 39Rg?

e

,F dt , ti
xx.9qqr=

; ef;qEE

F 3ae e.ee
I
zgSP'9E-=
+3
6=
=d

Ficure 5-14 (Sheet 3 of 8)
fAKEoFF DISTANCE
5-34

Original lssue

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

gEsErn
o

oP

5€

P

=9GE

.E=;
r.9

g

6ts

E

o
A@^^
E

Zits

liiii

oo!4

EX

ttiii

-

sEsEa*

E=E3
UBEE.
>@Ez

9 .,-

F: do
E!{;F

adH

tiiii

.iEEA

sai - ^
!2 X !;
g bE 5

rEiEan

tPlgt
:vE!:
RA9-,i
o q = 9?."

fi;e

EE=€8
o
z
H

.'i <'j

o

RRAAA Sgaaa

E;w

E
.E

rE:Egn

u,|....

q;

5 F9
F o
E
8>- E
6
E
2<)

56.
aifr
Ei

dqsee

-.5563--.r-

F

4E
3

F.

9-o .:.4-

831

b
z ;s9 :E
s F fi;3 IEE

t

z.

o
o

Original lssue

Effi*
>=
+a
a<
gF
Fieure 5-14 (Sheet 4 of 8)
'TAKEOFF DISTANCE
c-Jc

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

.g

Za

o

OE

sEgEan

b-

E:E*

9
:>
.=.=x

8,.

:96i6

U::E
o

t-6R
3E

*F

z,,
f,=iu

i(

.s

45549

Eeil

F=do
Pbeg
og sa

l

sEiEar

.9

o

qnEb
6.e 8,ii
i6;3I
6!=e
::; F

sfgEan
..If=tu
B8H

o q = a.=

o;5:r2

3 E;E3
g; "': .;

eEsEgr

z

5

EdF

.E=
>H ;g
x* a

6gi5
q
L.d
.l:

!?

5
^6

sil-

z;

Exj

Ul

e?, rE

3':ctE
;

E

I

PH
F.: v !!.y

a: &S{

o
N.t=

u3

i8
Figure 5-14 (Sheet 5 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE

5-36

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

g
oP

P EX
:!.€
E:: E
;E E 5
P+ia8

tlt!l

sEgeEn

ttiii

!lit!

=ih
PPU
(,
sfsEee

--i9

FE -'+
x o!=

Jf X:b
-F=6-

Pbee

Z'.L

tilii

8eH
<,

i[sa

:i-o d
;N E q
F 3 xE

rfiEsn

iig 8E
E

-l3
:eg=
g

EEA
oq=q.:
EE=Ef;
H

P;6j.t
o
2

i!
.g! ;
>H Ia
^_:
',=
& q

.E

3*69Co:6dg=oo
u/rvt
or
h qF_ -?o 69
=;'"''6*
^- o o: o.o<

EEBgEEEE
o
zo

rasEAn
z\t
-:
qo$i!

T

_

EdF

c.J.9* f)@

H":
=QF

Ei

i^^^^

B=an6+

Fcg*
>=
tr3
6=
=d

Figure 5-14 (Sheet 6 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Original lssue

5-37

sEcroN

5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

.=

o9

o

rEiEan

*on

e

EX

E;F

E;E*
o-

};;>.9 i

=.8

E

o

=

6=

gE

Fisure 6-14 (Sheet 7 of 8)
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
5-38

Original lssue

sEcTtoN

MODEL 406

5

PERFORMANCE

:

tttll

gegEEn

sH'
bn
1 Jt-

: E:
E:ft€
d-=:

illii

BEH

E

:E
E5
*olz
E63E
<)

h-6E

rEsE6n
o

;3E:

riiii

e;F

F= 6o
P6!29

i[14

;cr'E g

gEbE
*EE.E
I i;
=.9

sEgEEu

6*=.e
=W
6q

=r!:

EF
be:l

BEE

3fiE4.5
AE= E$
H-"i.j
o
z

E
.E
.E

F

sEiEan

c;F
fl

HH

o$g

i6

eF

>-

>=F

G

F
F-99+

u6x
z esg :hq

u)

F

z, .
o

d*ess

-E666

3Fc!G'+

6
zi

;8
- 9f;
g;! .:.sad<

F

Fi

E

5;3

HEa*
>=
+3
6=
gE

Figure 6-14 (Sheet 8 of 8)
TAKEOF'F' DISTANCE
Original lssue

J-.tv
SFAR 41

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE
CONDITIONS:

1.

2.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

NOTEi

Takeoff Power Set - Refer To
Minimum Torque For Takeotl
Graoh Fioure t10.
Wina Fla-Ds - T.O.
Lev;I, Hdrd Surface.
Dry RunwaY
UOwr FEpS - 9pen.
Inertial Separator - Normal.
Heater - As Required.
Autofeather - Armed.

1. Engrne is assumed to lail iusl prior to VR.
2. tf till power is apDtigd w hout Drakes sa,
3.
4.
5.

dtsrance

apply trom point where tull power is achieved.
Decroase total distance 5 percent tor each 10 knots
h€adwind.

lncrease tolal distance 25 percent lor each'10 knots
tailwind,
With ingrtial soparator in bypass position add 1000 teet
to altitude b€loro sntering tgbles. ffhis relalonship
assumos that bypass is not used above 20 degrees
C€lsius.l

IOTAL DISTANCE TO CLEAR
SO.FOOT OBSTACTT

PRESSURE

ALTITUDE . iI'EIGHT

.

V2.

POUNDS

KIAS

KIAS

9360

98

102

.20"c '10'c

. FEET

10'c 20'c 30'c 40'c 50'c

2908
3132
3388
3678
4013

3151

3415 37M
3406 3704 4038
3698 4043 4445
4034 ,t446 4968
4439 4981

4025 ,$79
4424 4893
4921 5578
6654
6793 8914

496r 5726 5887
5724 6942

9283

7000

4419
4953
5698

8000
9000

9813

Sea Level
1000
2000
3000

4000
5000
6000

6921
9805

9748

i'

4827
5,18i]

7608

10.000
11,000
12,000
r 3.000
14,000
S€a Level
't 000
2000
3000
4000

8300

98

102

2276 2434 2579
2342 3121 3319 4090
259r
n49 3140 3345 JCOJ 5152
2762 2951 3150
3s94 4014 8389
2751 2946
3616 3880 4912

242
2581

5000
6000
7000
8000
9000

2935

3147

3138
3368
3628
3934
4300

sti74 3638 3928 4256 5161
3939 4215 4682
3936 4297 4715 5850
€02 4744 5291
4753 5318 7423

10,000

4749 5326

r,000

6r63

1

12,000
13,000
14,000

6168

3380

3629

3908

4234 70o7

,:rt

1r

EXAMPLE:

Weight -

9C)00 Pounds.
Orrtside Air TemDerature - 16 D€ore€s C€lsius.
Pressure Altitudri - 24tJ0 Feet.
Headwind ComDonent - 19 Knots.

Distance To Accelerate Go lApproximation Msthod) - 5652 Fe€t (5115 Feet With Wnd
Correction).

Figure 5-15 (Sheet I of 2)
ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE
5-40

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

NOTE:

CONDITIONS:

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Takeoff Power Set - Refer To
Minimum Torque For Takeofl
Graoh Fiqule 510.
Wino Rabs - T.o
Lev6l, Hdrd surface,
Dry Runway
cowl Flaps - open.
Inertial Separato. - Normal.
Heater - As Required.
Autofeather - Armed.

1.
2.
3.

4.
5.

Enoine is assumed to lail iusl pnor to vR
lf fill oower is aDplied withoul brakes set dislance
aoDlv from Do|nt \ihere full powe' is achieved
D&iease total distance 5 percent lor each 10 knots
headwind.
Increase total distance 25 porcent lor each 10 knois
tailwind.
With inertial separator in bypass position add 1000 feet
to altitude beiore entering tables. (This relationship
assumes that bypass is riot used above 20 degrees
Celsius.)
TOTAL DISTANCE TO CLEAR
sO.FOOT OBSTACLE - FEET

PRESSURE

ALTITUDE . WEIGHT

.

V2-

FEET

POUNDS

KIAS

KIAS

Sea Level
1000

7300

98

102

'20'c .10"c
1871

10'c 20"c 30"c 40'c 50'c
2372

2503

2W

2243 2377 2515
2239 2379 2523 2671
2375 2524 2681 2845
2521 2685 2855 3037

2660

2811

1992
2111

2116

2242

3000
4000

1982
2103
2231
2367

5000

2514 2681

2861

6000
7000

2677

2860
2854 3055
3053 3279
3277 3532

3056 3264
3276 3512

2000

8000
9000

3818 4169
4157 5034
4159 4746 627-2
4579 6097
38r 9

42.98

3019

3687
4376

5134

ro]'

5!13

5606

nTt

5711

1837
1942
2056

3000
4000

1828
1935

1737
1837
1944
2057
2181

5000
6000

2049 2178 2315
2175 2315 2463
2310 2462 2626
2460 2628 2807
2626 2810 3008

2457
2616

Sea Level

3251

3495
3988
3527 3804 4855
3813 4435 6716

3530

10,000
11,000
12,000
13,000
14,000

3049

3092
3530
3242 4138
2831

3085
3544

6300

1000

2000

7000

8000
9000
10,000
11,000
12,000
13,000
14,000

98

102

1542 1638
1631
'1727

1733
1834
2055

194r

1938
2050
2171

2149 2461
2162 2278 2761
2293 2485 ,110

2041

2178 2304 2435 2781
2311 2448 2602 3149
2607

2796 3111
3003 3590
3394

2903

3632

278/ 3314 4384
4268

3894
4813
6984

u:9'

3012 3252 3956 5436
3241 3734 4792 s2:2
3242 3600 4417
3515 4207
4075 5\27 8843
2809
3012

urt

Fieure 6-15 (Sheet 2 of 2)
ACCELERATE GO DISTANCE
Original lssue

c-+

|

sEc'noN

5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

6Fe9

=*
P -H'o*
i.E HE H

bes
EI
Ee_e:-

>

9;;.eE
E=F1O
3ii:-JE

i;EE.;
E"9AF=
[S
ofr.
=Hi"
;l

'i

.x
e5- X
.^o 'r8.9=
{.
a ' F*

>

H aB e&{
(') '
l-g
-_q
.;:r.ErEh

z:EP 9€€
o

.E

!r*

E

<

,li

3

FeF

&-n

d' s)
H gg" oa

a*

.!Ap EP
Y-*
,l;9 5 :
];89,-a 6E
6i
TEO

=E#s
Figure 5-18
RATE-OF-CLIMB - ALL ENGINES OPERATING
(FLAPS . UP) (MAXIMUM CLIMB)
5-44

Original lssue

SECTION 5

MODEL 406

PERFORMANCE

or

3.tnNt!"r u3d

et3l @l - av{l-lc-lo-3J.vu

ra) s ,:: (t

.o

6

.

6l

- .^
-l-t-t-1-1-.1

F

(o 6

FS

sE
^9
;', E:
4 .EJ

sr
Z

F.9

F =6
EE
-9 _ur
E 3=,-*

s>f

E 6ts:
E -.; E;

,^,

'€

Ffl;F
5E;€e
;Hboor
E=Fs

o
<
Y

3€

=

e-.ee

EE€s; 5 e==

!;*l,iE ,EiPP
nEE-o;

E:EE
r- -#€*E
:tEE:.

]

EE#EE FHqq
z'Ea
<.-:,LZ
?iEEe' 6F

R

t

e9
65

;

g=
6 LR:
=JEE
9F+-ts *o

.'rt3g

^F

o t-o

o4F

q
o

ul

Fl

F
ott

o

IJJ

q;
F

=
N

oul
.?O.di

o
ul

6

9.=

? 5-Fn

uJ

oo

3

3S

g

6 Ao

E * E-=c€ -9
E +.
e€lpE:
5 EaEi
a:
s F.'^ n

'-6'=-€E ;:EE

Eigfl'ft
=o*.;.;+.;.;
3>

.!^.
g8; :1*i

5E

.:€ec€Ee
6i
H-

5c ,f€

,' '!
E.P
€=92
i"r

>,<

5eS
e=E =E9
t:5 n oI6

^

Figure 5-22
TIME, FUEL AND DISTANCE TO CLIMB - MAXIMUM CLIMB
5-48

Original lssue

SECTION 5
PERFORMANCE

MODEL 406

!{R

-t

B

=F
o

F

)i5

nts z

F

2

6.4

=tR
.3-|-c
-d

I9+-la
. H+:
tr FE

t=
z
6

6

ai
F

?fi

t>
'o

r46

,qo

ax'

bE

.

.a !

-

5- ;s*E;:
if +-"g 3 gE:sgE;

Eg

-EigFg:

4F

:a

EEEga

EE€EE;

EFSEgEE ,,E€E€;E
("j + d(o 3

'6,

F

89

o)E
(J

.92

g

igE"=

H;9

6
.=
I

i?:
:s:
9
o,E

dF:

6

$Hgl

o
z

I

@ I

E*=g

€i3
8U9

gE*
9 oi

8F5

*Hss

|Jl

o
z

54

pE
@ g

EE==

s

OE
E9'

9Eiq

69:
x< 6
:>*;
9 oE

3F5

$$*;

UJ

o
z

5q
FIi

ko

(I

6

E;

0,:l g
!o2
@J o
a o
s)=f
i -:
-

.::.'D<63
aast.
jH6E
b
,;-=EL4;!^!-9(,)
6: FESEES

EO-ar=(J:r
o
zfNf)*o@N
o

P.o., a I

'i 5 + q! .?

=e

53'.

CT9'?YY

ja(+66

ul E lr-

Ei

ro ES9 xn 6 :v: a€t sHgt o z d9 Fi = F CE I 6b alio g -d. q oJ o oEr.i;6 ,:;.'f@ c Eo!r fE*€ 9(:C X= ti Jvioi 9 df; $H*s o z Hg Fri F .:6 _E; a-r; s:="-Eiq .:='r<6x Ho8 aaFt j;-sg(,, .; k;.Er L E h FFs'E9,qEE o z-c\tr"s(oroFo o e!) o" EUr rllETL tri + Figure 5-24 (Sheet 6 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POVJER (1900 RPM) Original lssue 5-55 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE F ^o 62, I s s r9 3A a 3 .F oE ?- .9(J g 62 FO s 5S. :*; :"t I 8Uo :e; 3F5 r*ng aat $Hgt o z Hq Eri d a F =No<19 e 3t dja 8,1, E iE?-"{€ A g:;, . F*dB eest -..-iEEu*r k9 ihltl r|'|E:TL ZgtsEeEiX P8E_E;3ee 9-r-i+;";; o (-) <:+ Fisure 5-24 (Sheet 7 of 8) MAiIMUM CRUISE POWER (19OO RPM) c-co Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE 39 a: g HFESF i a2 3B s ,F 6E l- I 89 F3 ^e= BB 36 oE = EF, xs:I HHRPF E*=a =@ 6:A x= 6 :vt 9 o< 3q9 3E5 $Hgs 3S5RR o z :e Fi = p d: -d. Ee;i 3:=' s.= ir . eE i?fE E Hd8 aaae -f!= 6 6s!u) EaL= ! , .; a 3 *'ES:8fi FO-Cr=():r d z-9994 janY-5b6 rrlETI tri *L + Figure 5-24 (Sheet 8 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISD POWER (1900 RPM) Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE 6Z 8e 3 89 33 = 6= ic a8 NO ?- .= Re&NS 8e aaaaa 3 Eni; !p= :Fg -6 6l ol r$F6 9tao :s; 3E5 rl o z ql 6 Hq EE Eo 6il d 6 - I .: E13? € * -ix6. E_ ' s83{ . i!sff!29FEe=if; ;8E.s;3.Ef 9 r.i; +;.t; o Xd3

@ c !bB E*=g 69: x: d :ii 9 oi 6 ;- $HH; 3S5Eg '-: o z 5S Er F E -E 6 : Sl-". .i; f- ?i EeE EE;?1E E aaae JRod 6 ^-g_!(/) ,t bE.<:*E b 9 g E9d 3E9 99X g*Pg 6flE *Hea 9 oi s o z ee Er = E 3--"I9 , !E dja S.i,E Xd 3 aas€ ?E?-"*E* eFe, , h: ..:9 df : = FF"gEgEEE 9 o t .i.'i +; ,.t; eTi{q 994a9 E!) o- g3UJ |lli:r! IEJ sP FiEure 6-25 (Sheet 3 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (r8oo RPM) 5-60 Original lssue SECTION 5 PERFOBMANCE MODEL 406 !: 89 8A :< F 89 s3 = .F dE *e ' 89 @6 .2 () PB g :g Eq' e&eRR Fa: >@ I qbd .9: x=d :'i: E$FE 3F€ $HHs o z Hq gf E I d: 3:! -d. oJ o" o g 96r ci; b 1 eE i?fE E o=e $.r96?a @ Hu8 eaFe jEoSSo' 5,.EEEEE FO-O-r5(J:r 5tsUEr! Ei E o zF(!.fr*6(oFo Figure 6-25 (Sheet 4 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1800 RPM) Original lssue 5-61 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 { a2 83 o- = F 89 8e :9 E88 .Fj 6= F3 F r2 FO @6 s 9E =R. !nE PaaSa g$tE SEe Eig 8U9 :si Ee€ 3EE a aaabS $E*a o z. ER6RA d3 ts,r qqi4{ 9" r6 c n ke o' db -o =z 6J ci 6 o 9 t!' ;E:3€€s 5HaeFe !4 E!9 i!*3Sgff3 - c,r 3:3E$E$ tro.o--r>e:! Io t ..i.; + ;..t ".- 33?33 -+ Fieure 5-26 (Sheet 5 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1800 RPM) 5-hz Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE 89 3e r9 33 .t-.- 6E RHHHR F P&h$a -< ERRRR 3 89 o6 -9() s FO 3o :g = ERRRR =P >t q x: ;v; bt Esnr abSaa 90-l dl.:E $Eet z 34 a3a3a FE CE 6 .i; .,d. e;! fe ct" 3=---.Eq= eE l?fE E aaae (, Zg+PPEIH rHo3 6 -g-! .;,=EL!t!=! . E3;_E;3ef 6 zFcrr(t*o@F. o o tsENRP EQ9EE fi5n UIEE j-+6;d Ei <:+ Figure 5-25 (Sheet 6 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISD POWER (1800 RPM) Original lssue 5-63 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE 39 83 s 89 o- .F 6= 3 -o 6Z o)E .9() FO ?a :E Eq' c XR: g odd =6 s g$FE 8U9 gs; 385 $HHa 'iii o z. d9 R$SEg Ei Eo Pii :E 6b I' t33 a (r=: ^:;5 '-E'=*{;8 gxa. ' 6" H?3 44.4{ =F.N'YI E9 ct' 8,), E ,.,i+ slili;; Z I HE sEit Ei !o t t,'; +;.t * H8E J=3 aaaaa EE fClF .E.E ui-r! GJ <:+ Ficure 5-25 (Sheet 7 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1800 RPM) c-o+ Original lssue SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 82 q 33 3 FPPF€ 89 q g AR .f- i6E 2e ' -9! 89 ra s (J oE E3* fpd:q Ex=- aaaSa >@ I qbd .q: x= 6 ::v: 9 oi dfi $fr*E o z 14a *4 !Ei aaRsg tsu- Eo gr 6 x: .=; -6. . 3:i s E: 3=3 eE i?fE E (/i HdB aaFt j-E q,SS@ H6.E**E i' FFs'E9.BEE o Z-cros6(oF o k -<> ul' .lUt :'0F 6P9ee rJJ-L Ei 6b+ Figure 5-25 (Sheet 8 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (18OO RPM) Original lssue c-oc sEcTtoN 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE ftE 39 83 aaSaa 3 F 6Z o- = t- dE :s9aa 3AE53 E s2 o6 9a) .\ tt FO 3 PP=8ts E5; .X Agg RE gsP33 g E*FE o6d =6 Fe8 x_=; :;e se5 c, 3EE $HHs =l 8l EI F, 6l *eaa5 o z. ee t a db .=Z !s | sEu EJ ! - *.;+;-; (.) Eo a= N? oE, *.q H€,9 ee*8€ a:^EEg.qEEI 9l <-E io I 555"Y"r 9" | ----- HN Pti;; ,;= 8l a9a F;E i-g?'"*€* _"ie ll 'l EE FA IE c, I -oF I +?sF+ qqE\E ;99 9P 9X:i i66 g€egg el *E Q9 a == =q =EP E €i | 6-9 I d6q3 '.ji =i6= LI Fieure 6-26 (Sheet 1 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1700 RPM) f,-oo Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE F ^cl i52 c = i ^cl 62 .t- F 7e = 6E F 62 !r:t FO .3E ?q ()t qF, 5:99& = F5i; .F3E >@ g E;U 69: Esrg 8F€ $fr*; x= d :;: g g€ rli z. ee FE F ?fT a ;@ .=: 6,q . l!) o- i 5H* (,t t ltl :E?+i€ 3{E ce.Fe .*ig pii;: J E EESEEfi 6 ZF6l@ 3 E*rg adE68 *;T o!p:' x= d :;* :6.Y dFi E. $EH; sdggg z Hq RPbAS Er t RPS-= !D q ?! .=: . 6,9 -q .Es 3=-- .E;TfE @ = C Htdo'#+-' as.F* J-9 ' bEE*_:E b le oH; agb r<||+q'Pqe9 t565t5 E 5t555E frEH E= 5 e e HE'aEE Fo_o_J=o!r !; o (.) "r; +.;..; i Figure 5-26 (Sheet 4 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1700 RPM) Original lssue 5-69 SECTION 5 PERFOBMANCE MODEL 406 89 3A c 3 3 F sE = at, Fj bL a2 .24) FO o9 RHHHR F s RRRRR aaas R Fi Eti; P= :6 E 'X E$i6 6:d i_?: :s6 E*E 8E5 t! o z HEeE *aaft: EEgSg €€€g$ gHg;H ggRRR a=a8F -., = CE ae Fri sEESE aa83A 5q AASPS | =F<"rP qP:&E a , I=Z 6J.i (D=l JE 60P : : X5 -:.E.' =*{E gXA. , A"S Bg3 ag.fr{ ..:9 fiii: !2 6 e= -=E IP- HHn 9 XVi5 E o- l'-'?\; qqq\E a ES.EE. a 3REB3 RftX&R- HE* + *'i'f ril1,'#3{th3$F3i'?" (1700 RPM) 5-70 Original lssue sEcroN 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 3 89 8B 3 89 8F :F x', :* .4d ot F 89 qrt FO = HHHHR E5; .E aE =(o9 E*=g F;E de: x: d :;: peE |ji G. de: $H*E 33$Es z ee Er = a rO e F *! f _: =; tji a 8,1 E .1!':*{€F *dE aeFe j-6 -SSo ' 6 zFN('{r)(oF=EPEgEEe o N.o+oa 3r, ul' c lrl .,-|Jl ;aaaa rrr i: rr IEJ o *L + Figure 5-26 (Sheet 8 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1700 RPM) Original lssue 5-73 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 8e 83 F o- = 89 F 3B bF E2 82 .88 P E, = 3 FO ?a 8n: E =6 E;E 69: x4 6 E$=5 3EE $HHs E (.) ;sa uJ G o .b 2 EsPg F;{ 69: x= 6 :YR G, 8eE 3EE $$gq d'i :aaag o z Hq Fr = ul frEH Y 9t(v6b6 gEEEg a- Ei <:) Fieure 5-27 (She€t 3 of 8) MAXTMUM CRUISE PowER (1600 RPM) J-/O Original lssue SECTION 5 PEBFORMANCE MODEL 406 3B = 3B o. HHFPE :a s Bg a8 RFEEE F a9 ,F 6 F a2 FO ?(JP F = 'Fa =a.,ts >@ I BAAA s*Pa ebE -E: gEP P+6 E, dEi *HHg R:8AA z 5q FE F .to U] e -c Pts .=: 3==-- 6.9 . F J d ,--EaAS€ -q(/, . Ps,B g$FEEEEe 9:.D * ('c,l \: P ';.!+9q, Y kq o- s E.= ;E:s€E P a3h rr, E r! E* EPE9E gHSEF aaaa a 6 zFN.r*(o@F Figure 6-27 (Sheet 4 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1600 RPM) Original lssue 5-77 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 a2 8B s s9 83 = -F i6E 7e asbSE ^o 6Z oE () FO .92 .tt s ()9t cE cEi =a-q :6 E6d aaEsa g$FE E60 *,= ;;6 6 G, :o; 6PE !! o z, $HHs _: alaSE RRRRR Hg EE = E E.r 9o E!.t 63 a o-l S,i, E * 5H. s=H H?3 44.fr{ .*i9 gdd;; Ei ie?="€€ gh6. '6_ || --*-= (\r.{ f F <{ I **-- I oFF-('r(D F :'lrE E8E5=8ee 6 zFNcr*()@Fo *5665 g.E .Eg- a- qlL-E Ei <:+ Figure 6-27 (Sheet 6 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1600 RPM) Original lssue 5-79 SECIION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE 39 F 8B o. r9 33 c = 3 RF:AA g F s9 ^Q o6 ?o .9 (J RA = EN; c =6 6:6 860 Esrg 3EE HHea 6; e o z ae EE = E =--qq a 9 ti3 a EE iE?"{€ * Hsg aaFe ."i9 ef f 1= FFgEgEEE !; o,:; 3:, A,i, E +; o; * frHr xaa88 g.B. . .E EEH 4< o + Figure 5-27 (Sheet 7 of 8) MAXIMUM CRUISE POWER (1600 RPM) c-ou Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE F a2 3B = F 8e 8t fj dE Eg ^ .88 2a o* o- s rg F RF = P!; Eaeg >= z, Err o o, a).9 I 3 o I $FEE 9f '6 $FEHE }E? eg F i-9 ui 2 o =6 o g I #leEE a;-sE F dE 'E E-- 8eE 51=-{ €g R d d d iia I o E.5;5E; o 5g 33PES o -! tb g> F .5 =9 k9 ul.... ao s9,9< zt *p c=d€ Eo. .= $iEE o ?5 g) E6666 Ei 6E Et- .o{ := 6-9 =.! .9)

E z 9r,9 = de-iE ddPS P' $iFH6 9; g B(] z, di o *iEg .E E $FFHE PF = E. 1z- g: {E-'--n .:.,r ,5{EE ;i."EHE 3 Hq,e,8,frf 4t iE c=s€ 6 zo o $FE6 F5;,i=i ee oH,n aaaaa o=w Ei o <9- Ficure 6-28 (Sheet 5of8) MAXIMUM EANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE (1900 RPM) 5-60 Original lssue SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 2 o s {EiE EdPS dErHt Ed-;9 E Ei >= 3,P z. o a g=- s dEi€ nlJbq dtr*E d d o-;9 =] G^o E5 P- o o z z, -o '6 s dx+E irFE E o F ;: 9E YX Ir z2; t!a F,;E E g,P z, s d=+$ de 3;FB g5 *iFH6 nb 5l -6 z o o z s dE3€ ddgS .E o : ,9; 9E =zd d",: .._o .=*{6E (!E ' . ts* 33$€ jx H3 SoSSo ' dh= o9 3'r- o z -o gE t 9f t $IEE ab9F8 P3A&g FFFHS gY RR&98 aRa6a '6 E }F E -9, o E.o 6e =t =6 z o o z t '6 l?d plE;l '6 eeeee SSSHF o F 6 oi .^. nc= <€ _o. i.'€ € g b6 J9 !4 3g&fr2 b< i -=#9 E(rF 55€ei o s *FMH6 gH- Naa9 aE >= q9YTT rrqrq9 qqq+F =q .E tee ee t:= ag; .9 Fi <9 o,rexr orur,[i€X"r€cuii23J$13$ (1600 RPM) 5-90 -a 6: F 9" Ir.r o- {: o >^-/< = if i$b.MA NcE Original sEcTtoN 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 I3 E F8A9P R&R 3AA $FFH5 E .Ei ^ $FE5 F .z= 3,P 2 PE E t q5 a$r $FE; E a $Ftr 3 3g 6-O =6 fia9ea cl 2 3 o I '6 B 6 o F 'i siri Yq ,,,r. E, *; =_z; H ' I0-' .d s: i:- o6 0 0 Et *?: *e gs$a $iE6 R e aa F i6 ;43 F*.q{ ..j biE!:E b 65eE5'.iEE d !r g-BEEH 6 eP EPegP 9q9 t56865 Fi E o).9 9L o 2 - I q5 E s FR gNEE G *;rH =9 TE8 fr3*5 S ASRR& AR9F5 8E$A 5 5RfrRR : at:3 $5fl aa 9Y tra5aa ;iq ul =6 38E68 ag+ aE 5&s819 o 2 3 o z I .9 *eri sFrHE 5 q:( o a o o{2 i x(5 ooaz< 9i= H8f c= Ei ,5;d "if; 9- .1.;+; ", EgSHR gF a3s $asae RA=AE F= :>^ 6.:9 151"i€.9 'J9 6 ' ' 62 sts=E qqq{E Ee o- r,-9\= P'n -Eeeee AEfr s"'- F{ q?$$F qEsqq g_EEg.E AEEEA RSXAR

5 g,P 44333 2 f 9b q5 I 5 sPrE as Ese $FFHE =] ag8 t(f 8F& cl z z E 8 .= dEit E5g EdgS o : sirHi !E Eo 3:' i *E.'^e * r-&€E .:.o $ Bd ca.fr* ,i'j;iE"_1E b /F'BEE 5=8ef 6 =3F (vos6@ zF o. 8S ARN 9:9 -., i:, a55sP P -or 39558 gln 5 .td s-*" F..o'; = P9R 6545 Figure 5-29 (Sheet 6 of 8) MAXIMUM RANGE CRUISE PERFORMANCE (1600 RPI\O Original lssue 5-95 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 s o a EA $iE5 $ SAAF $FEHE EC} >= o.s, o z) agsgb s R gY a q: $FEE $FEHE 8863F gsgss g$ 598 5BB hqq tlLi rl =c z5 o a o z)a .9 F sa s$a a$ 3 5+935 $EFE o *irHa F 6 9" 7 ' .bi .a9 $be$8 gg 3s5 gR FSRFF asRah e+9as SFF9' ls -*3 E ^g!-q P= 6a ?c -5= =o 6 o (! aasR* HEn I Ei sEgEg gEE. .E. E6 ct.n --E 6b Fisure 5-2e ,"o."j gfi$L"MANCE MAXTMUM Fo*?ft3fHf;r, J-YO Original lssue SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE t z o $FEE gFEH6 E <,! a F Eg d).9j o t = o t q5 $FIE 8tE5e a c! $FFi 9= 5; 6^o F =(f a t o o z I 'd HFF6 5 E F i* HFM! B eE YX iia .E;9 i-4r d;5 a c;;?fEe pe.Fe E3o+---' !3 g ' (/)biF c Hr lt c.i F Lil 5 F 4. o*E E€- 6 F g:F eE: :g E=Eg; =EE 5FE;f;S f 1d.* npl .r 4ts*rE SEscF H= d_J=i> =d l;o - *;+;o Figure 5'35 LANDING FIELD LENGTH REQUIRED Orioinal lssue 5-t03 sEcTroN 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE Qqq EpE E ! NSt i! ! rr B';E ;E g H +s E€5 . lE; I iF;tii$ rEgEan ggg II A:BEEEE HAE;::E E; 8; p*s g :;! SEE icrEERfr c:E5::3 [;s€ pi a: rfgEae PFE g =soPi;_gE q"-€ EEEE s :liEsHs:E Fe H;.i z 6ifi =Jh EE* lo l^= sEgEap I E= I tE lou- 2..- ssEEit cdH dj+d I E! lEx l'- l;3 sEsEau I EdH q. ; - t,-Ri.o l t:= i lPg lE+ A qi9lP< "qi ; :{E: l:; . |; 69 I 19 gea , l E; E ,i FI Pt FieF | 5f -! xx t-6 i1;il&a ,ic 59E I ee 3:"s qi | .i3 Figure 5-36 (Sheet 1 of 8) LANDING DISTANCE 5-104 1 June 1987 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 9! E 9!P o 6: r t ;TE E:S H .e EEE :iX E5E EEE e9? !6=FFFx i IEEE s559 bEE 9*"9I s s 9 EE ie'-3!F* eIEi-*e-!< i= E: sl) q=:FeE3 ;EEEfE6 *I e c!€E R;€Bg€c !iiE3s;.= Pgfie3frB g: EcEEi a;;6 -.i o z P ilili rE:Ean Z ,i- ittii I6ll (5- iiiri sEgEa* z,r tiitl epH c'- sEgsEe gESbS z,E oFr! (5- rEgEan z.* Sil|r PPH (,i Pd a3a88 aaaaa 3 e; 3 6; 6E; ES =: '-I g:E= g Er5 e eH33 .d,* *p1 H'iE;9 cc _=:E'; z4 +E Pg; oo i-5;_3j o o 1 June 1987 ;iz ER Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 2 of 8) LANDING DISTANCE 5-105 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE I o.9 8EE E ;*E :eE H.8: gE: = EEE €€g Yd 9! ! Fi;=e 3,:--&&E E o E;sEan 2., (5* E i 5 s5r€!EE E+PsEEg 9=q<3Oo icxiF9* s;E i;e€ P€ 5 T 3 o s sEsEEn z, ., 5E* q3:EeE3 ;9EijStsA El6 E€Ex r;sEEn +3: ss€.E e o !H339;EF Hg$EgEgE g 5; e€3€g t! -i ^i Z-.* o- o z sEisAn cl -,E 2 OFul E;E ct- a; :.€ Y ,94 ri o a! 6u Y c cc: '=-9ol-.o: 69.P9 3 y {;,q F -:E 6 =p o o F;gEE 5-106 rrlFE ir-' e6?? HHE= ;ez, ii gF Figure 5-36 (Sheet 3 of 8) LANDING DISTANCE 1 June 1987 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 Eeg 4c: o 5! d+6 PERFORMANCE E e E sagsEn iiiri ittii iiill ltili 9 .; APF ;E:; E.8* E€E E;: **c :9R isE : A-.joo zI-il! ,rOtur EE* 6 E:; F::5 g:*[EBE e5ssEEE EEBEgHE ' E_:; aols zf.iul.r- .:-g;,9=.99 E^;::ox gEgear g: E;:Ri E=qtgsi ;EE E*E 6 E;€FgCg EU!402:E EgBcEFs H! EgE!! H;.i o itiii 6eiEEn ti o6!! EFG iii (.'- 2, ,E epH ct- z EeiEan EHFSH z, t-iul.E BgH II 9?9 ,9:: :9* q*^ Ba EEFgH I9 !, 9: aaaSa a< E+ dH a€:EEgE iEE:id€ <-tiA *pl cc E o'f i ! z= RE a9: HH 8.5;-:= ..i.'i +;,.t 9t o sEE= ;q G= gF "'f x"'f 1 J une 1987 ""*3Sfsiii,8trt) 5-107 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORMANCE doo E!! P segEan -:; Cq! seE 2., OFt! (5- EEE I:Ei €€; I : Fbt::9 II e:*ates sE:Ean H?E:::E P5#Es; ;9.=Fg* e:EE;e€ Z,* f_ir! O^t! o- E= E; s.e.; its b ts o P€ 9R :9: E! Bi€qgc;e :3 Hii EeE E ggEEiE FE o sElstn <-h 0d-n 6E- 2 sEgEan 3 9 q EiE EE* a> ".? I ul._'. odi "ol,9 t .FF; :g Ed 9; dA c? - o: r::3EF; =-9 Te::-r;"8 +T€,8 e:E 4r e o-*5 FEPg; n_5=-9= ;d == 6 zo 3ab9E Aros()@ UJFI! Erj eFSE HBiB-,o 62 gF Figure 5-36 (Sheet 5 of 8) LANDING DISTANCE 5-108 'I June 1987 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 FpE ! B'RF ;E 5 3 A - E: F FdE Pg6 'i 49 ,^aa €F; EE: q = =d p PERFORMANCE o *3$pEs tr9pH3* lttti cr, z. ,E c'- -i! Fi;=e g:-Bs5 F E 5 g**BI aE I sasE6n gr€Ve€9 ie.SEFP cE E i:*n€ P: b:: ti 4 = tiiii c;e 63E69X9 lpcEEsH E!iP€E: rr:sse a!€ F€Et s E}8Eg;EF 2.ts t.i|r1 PFH ct- Fc EEEg€E o z o Z.E .ExE ct- c HA12a-'6 ii2 !uo Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 6 of 8) i-ANDING DISTANCE 1 June 1987 5-109 SECTION 5 MODEL 406 PERFORNNANCE gsP :;E iB 9I g rEsEee EeE EEE 9BF 3+h o- EqE ; PS E;-E. : Fbz=e i O-ul 3iHBFFE s5E3 b"E E E5F; E g; ;9d=0PX rEgEsr 5 EE 3s:1 c;e s:E E:n€ FE c e 3 fl q ipc 3EE H .E! E F€E* e;€ lgEE e :3dEi3osE CH$HEfiqE fiE egEeSE o sHgsEn gAPJS e.96!+ 6.E P-.i - z o rEssAn 2..9 q 8EE <99; R,E E 5di oF 5 i :!e 1c ! 9q r 06 s* 3 o '.=9 69:9ePY ,9F 9: EEE o? i*o.9 *pY b--Ef E .;-=au--E *Es9: d- J;3; EY == o zF o ir5 -.6?? HHE= +3 ii z, g8 N(ri\t6@ Figure 5-36 (Sheet 7 of 8) LANDING DISTANCE 5-1 10 1 June 1987 SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE MODEL 406 E.9geE € q eF* !:; E E5 z,r ' illrr -irJ o=uJ PtsE EEE EE: r liiii rEgEEn E rirll ct- €€Eb d: !:Fr x o d*-oo ^ E: BAEE g5:c E o 6EE rEgEar a) EEFEESi 2..- PiE;:Ri PEH st;; cii$HuHs H: EEAES cj+d H -"i o z ttill o- E=psgS; ,E* ggEg a"-a iEEe e FE €333F E o b sE:Ean 2'.3.iul e9H (,- sHtEsu z.i .^ I+ <; saRaa G;E o- P9 F€E aBi (, E i u* !, Ro e; gg E: d! SiiAp H9 o-:'X i6 ' w/q ,,"(rd:c d d ogi: Z= il=-35 +Es9; HH !o ^i.";+;.' 1 June 1987 IIJ HEFFF Ei EEe* HHE= +8 az gR Fieure 5-36 (Sheet 8 of 8) r;ANDING DISTANCE 5-1 11(5-112 blank) SFAB 41 sEcTtoN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE TABLE OF CONTENTS TNTRODUCTION ..... AIRPLANE WEIGHING Page .........6-3 PROCEDURE .....6-3 WEIGHTANDBALANCERECORD .......6-? WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR FLIGHT . . 6-? AIRPLANEWEIGHINGFORM. .......,..6-9 WEIGHTANDMOMENTTABLE. .......6-10 ^IENTER-OF-GRAVITY LIMITS ENVELOPE GRAPH ...... 6-16 SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM . 6-1? WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD ...,..6.18 EQUIPMENT LrST . . . 6_19 (6_20 blank) WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM 6-19 (6-20 blank) Original lssue - 1 July 1986 6-1 (6-2 blank) SFAR 4I sEcroN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 INTRODUCTION Section 6 of this handbook provides procedures for establishing the weight and moment and procedures for determinaimlane's basic emptv-balanie for flieht. This section also describes all ind the weieht anit itelms on th; Weight and Balance Data sheet which was provided with the aimlane (locatcd in the back of this handbook in a plastic envelope) as delivered from Cessna Aircraft, Company. NOIE It is thz responsibility of the operator to erLsure thAt thg airitnnp is lnadbd proierly. ^AIRPLANE WEIGHING PROCEDURE To Establish Basic Empty Weight The airplane nust be weighed in the following configuration 1. Wing flaps shall be fully retracted and all other control surfaces shall be in neutral. 2. Service engine oil and landing gear hydraulic fluid reservoir as required to obtain a normal fi.rll indication. 3. Check landing gear down and parking brake released. 4. R.ernove all equipnent -tools, and items not to be included in basic, eqFty cont€nts in cabinets and drawers and flobrweight such ig mats. 5. All equiprnent and furnishings must be in their standard location to facilitati corrections to "Airplane Standard Empty Weight" and "Center-of-Gravity'' location. 6. All seats shall be properly installed on tracks and placed in the most forward positibn against the seat stop. All seat backs shall be in the vertical-position a;d seat belts crossed on the seat cushion. ?. Close all bagg.age. doors, tailcone access door, main cabin door and emergency exrl wrndows. 8. Clean the aimlane inside and out. 9. Remove all snow, ice or water which nay tre on the airplane. 10. Weigh the airplane in a closed hangar to avoid errors caused by air ' currents. 11. Defuel the airplane in accordance with the following steps. Original lssue 6-3 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 CONDUCT ALL DEFUELING OPERAflOlvS AT A SATE DISTANCE FROM OTHEE AIRPLANES AND BUILDINGS, FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT MUST BE READILY AVAILABLE. ATTACH TWO GROUND WIRES FROM DIFFENENT POINTS ON THE AIRPLANE TO SEPARATE APPROVED GBOUNDING STAKES. THE USE OF TWO GBOUND WIRES WILL PEEVENT UNGROUND. ING OF THE AIRPLANE DUE TO AC. CIDENTAL DISCONNECTING OF EITHEN WIRE, a. T\rrn off all electrical power. b. Tum crossfeed selector OFF. c. Remove engine cowl. d. Disconnect the engine fuel supply line on each engine and insert these lines into suitable fuel containers. e. Apply external power to the airplane. f. Energize the fuel boost punps until fuel flow is terminated' TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE FUEL BOOST PUMPS, SHUT OFF THE PUMPS AS SOON AS FUEL FLOW B TERMINAI|ED. Drain the remaining fuel through the fuel lrain and - crossfeed valves into an apprdpriate container. Each drain should remain open until the deiireling rate slows to approximately I drop per second. h. The fuel remaining on-board after defueling is residual fuel and is included in the basic empty weight. i. Drainable unusable fuel must be added aft.er the weighing to obtain basic empty weight. Figure 6-1 includes the weight and arms necessary to add the drainable unusable fuel. o-+ Original lssue sEcTloN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 12. Leveling }IOTE The airplane mrnt be leuel during weighing to d.eterrnine the Center-of-Grauity. Always Leuel laterally before leueling longitudinnlly. a. On landing Gear (1) Inflate the main gear struts to maximum extension and the nose gear strut to ninimum extension. (2) Place scales under nose wheel and each main wheel. (3) To level laterallv. place a spirit level directly on the seat -fi.rselage ' tracks over the -mii:r station 1??.45. Adjust spar the main gear tire or strut pressurC to center the bubble. (4) level loneitudinallv, unscrew the two screws approxi' ' To matelv 0.25 inch at "iivel Point" on the right side of the fuselase at Stations 248.25 and 272.65. Place the level on these icrews and level longitudinally by adjusting the nose wheel tire or strut pressure to center the bubble. b. On Jack Points KEEP THE AIRPLANE LEVEL WHILE JACKING TO PREVENT SLIPPING OFF JACK POINT AND DAMAGING THE AIRPLANE, ltotE strut to preuent allow minimum' Lota| jac- When possibl,e, secure nose gear extension. Thi,s hing heieht. uill (1) Raise the airplane with the hoisting jacks until all wheels are clear of the floor. (2) To level laterallv, place a level directly on the seat tracks over the main spai nnelage station 177.45. Raise or l')wer the jacks under ihe wing iack poinLs until the level bubble centers. (3) To level longitudinally, unscrew the two "Level Point" screws approiimately 0.25 inch on the right side of. the fuselase ai StationB- 248.25 and' 272.65. Place a level on these icrews and raise or lower the nose jack until the level bubble certers. Original lssue 6-5 sEcTtoN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 When weighing on the wheels or jack points with mechanical scales, ensure the scales are in calibration within the last 6 months and used per the manufacturer's recommendations. When weighing on the wheels, deflate or inllate the gear struts and/or tires until the airplane is level. Gear struts and/or tires must be serviced per maintenance manual before airplane is put back into service. 14. When weighing on the jack points with electronic weighing sca.les, attach the electronic weighing cells to the proper mounting adapters to prevent slipping. a. Prepare the electronic weighing kit, which has been calibra+*d or certified correct in the last t2 months, for use by following the manufacturer's instructions provided with the weighing kit. Adjust all jacks simultaneously until the cells are in contact wiih the jick poinLs. Contimie jacking, keeping the airplane level, until the airplane is supported at the jack points only. 15. Determine scale reading, ecale drift and tare from all three scales. lo, Lower the airplane and clear the weighing cells as soon as the 1Q readings are obtained. 77. Computations (refer to Figure 6-1). a. Enter the scale reading, scale drift and tare from ell three scales in the columns in the Aiplane As Weighed Table. Compute and enter values for the Net Weight and Airplane Total As Weighed columns. b. Determine the Center-of-Gravity arm of the airplale using the formula presented in Figure 6-1. c. Enter the total Net Weight and Center-of-Gravity Arm in the a;d Center-of-Gravity Tible columns. Multiply the Weight (Pounds) entry times the Centerof-Gravity Arm (Inches) entry to determine Moment Basic Empty Weight (Inches-Pounds/100) entry. Total each of the thre€ columns to determine basic empty weight, Center-of-Gravity arm and moment, TOIE An attempt should be made to uerifit the results of each weighing, uhcn data for comparison is auailable. Center-of-Gravity arn and moment in the Weight and Balance Computation Form, refer to 6-4 and the Weight and Balance Record, refer to Figure 6-5. d. Enter Basic Empty Weight, 6-6 Original lssue z\ sEcTloN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 WEIGHT AND BALANCE RECORD The Weight and Balance Record, refer to Figure 6-5, provides a record to reflect the continuous history of changes in airplane structure and/or equipment which affects the weight and balance of the airplane. The Basic Empty Weight of your airplare is entered at the appropriate location on the Weight and Balance Data sheet as delivered from the factory. Changes to the structure or equipment should be entered on the Weight and Balance Record when any modifications are made to the airplane. It is the responsibility of the airplane owner to assure this record is up to date, as all loadings will be based on the latest entry. WEIGHT AND BALANCE DETERMINATION FOR FLIGHT The following is a sample weight and balance determination. For an actual determinition for vour airblane. refer to the equivalent illustrations on the Weight and Iialance Data sheet provided in your airplane. To compute the weight and balance for your airplane, use Figures 6-2 throueh 6--5 as follows: - fut th" Basic Ernpty Weight and Moment/lO0 from the latest entry shown "on the Weight and Balance Data sheet or Weight and Balance Record and enter them in it€m 1 (Basic Empty Weigh-t) of Figure 6-4._ For this sample, assume a weight bf 5190 pbui:ds aid --- ofl -.-- mornerit/rOo ---*-- 8884.5e. -'l NOTE A blank Weight and .Bqlance Form for th,e operator's conuenience, is prouided., at thc end of this sectlon. Deterrnine arm, weight and moment/l00 of the crew, passengerc, from Figures 6-2 and 6-3 and 6nter t-hem unilir- Payload Computations in Figrire 6-4. The crew and passenger loading table is applicable only when the Center-of-Gravity of the occupant is at the location specified. baggage and cabinet contents If the seats are in any other position than stated in Figure 6-2, the moment must be computed by multiplying occupant weight times the arm in inches. A point 9 inches forward of the intersection of the seat bottom and seat back with seat cushions compressed can be assumed to be the occupant Center-of-Gravity. For a refirence in determining the arm, the aft end of the cabin seat tracks is fuselage station 289.08. Refer to Figure 6-4. Total the Payload Computations items and enter the resulting Weight and Moment/100 in item 2. 1 June 1988 o-/ sEcloN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 Refer to Figure 6-4. Total items 1 (Basic Empty Weight) and 2 -l(Fuselage Payl6ad) to determine appropriate entries'for item 3 (Zero lFuel Weight with Zero Wing Locker Payload). I I R"f"r to Figure 6-4. Item 4 (Wing Locker Payload) is determined from Table of Fizure 6-2. Ithe anplicable -- I I R"t", Lo Figure 6-4. Item 5 (Fuel Loading) is determined from the applicable Table of Figure 6-2. Total items 3,4 and 5 to deterrnine 6 (Ramp Weight). Enter item 6 I-totals in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is within allowable linits. If the poini falls within the envelope, the lbading is approved. If the point f; s outside the envelope, it \i,ili be necessary to redistribute the load. (Less \el- Fo1- Taxiing) from I Refer to Figure 6-4. Subtract item 7itim 8 (Takeoff Weight). The to delermine lit --b fn"-o" Weisht) -t*iins 'frol-"nt'oi-thi tu"i -r;;d i;. is determi"ed by the difierence in moments -t"t"ls of the fuel loaded and the fuel remaining after taxi. Enter item in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is within allowable ttakeoff'weisht must never exceed 9360 pounds). If the point falls outside of the envelope, it will be necessary to redistribute the load. la -limits Refer to Section 5 for estimated fuel used during the flight. Determine of the fuel to be used. The moment h determined thJ esiimatcd weight "in momenl,s of the fuel remaining after taxi and the br. th" diff"t"tt"" reaching the destination. Obtain Momen'r,/lO0 from after fiiel remainine 6-2. Eiter the total of these weights and Moment/100 in item 9 lFisure -(kss Fuel To Destination). Item 9 (Landins Weishi) is delermined by subtracting item 9 from it€m 8. Enter itern- t 0 to-tals in Fizure 6-3 to determine if the loading is within allowable limits. If the point falls within the envelope, the loading is appr.oved. If the point falls outside the envelope, it will be necessary to red!'ctnbute lne toao. o-t 1 June 1988 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 NOTE IT tS TttE SESmNSIBlUry fHE rHAf rm r5o am TEE AIRPIANE IS LOADED 250 300 350 &O .USELAGE STATION (FS) _ OF OPERAMR TO ENSURE .r50 INCHES LOCAIING CC WITII AIRPLAI{E OiI LANOINC GEAA L€GEND Dim6Nion l - fldizdral dlri.n4 lrm oimeion a - afior altpld. k l.v€l m Ho.t2@rrr di3t @ r.m c.nlo. ot netn bndtng g4r axt€ lo c.nr$ ot noe ta.di.g gss arr6 (d6tehin€d by no$u.€m€n, @los). .€lor*a datuF lo dtd ot mah taiding g.$ dto obrain l}ls dBi.m by n€asunng hm and 3lb3rsctinq rhi3 var6 tr@ dtMsad A ;nd a.tding to FS 99'\@ 54. )*rr potrI FS 09 5r b @w ot tw bndi.g gs.. .ie {Mu3l b. m6&r.d aft6r atlPl.G is r.vor 6 s€t6.) FOBMUT lorLonoitudinarco (om.Nis CG ^- ot .,o,*.- e, Cd., _ N€r a) x tN@ r6.di^q w€€rnX N6. .nd Main wo,oht I Llrd,no G.at rolabd{ _ LEVELTNG PnOVtSlOftS LOCATING CO WITH AIRPLANE OII JACK PAOS T-."-"*-";-*'"*;;-l I FORMULA tor Longinxrn.r CC cG ^h aa'lM 104.51 o' 2o.r os x iNo.6 J.ck po^l ---...'.i9:$|+{@ ./'d wns rdcr w€lghr Poinr Tor.r€dl , ) FUSELAGE -, I L TER^L I ArFS243,2s AND FS 272.65 ON SE^r rR^Ct(S OVEA - M rrsp^R rd P.rhr _ _. - MAC An ------_naE(cG ol Ar@€ftr 160 04 DFAINASLE IINIISABLE FUEL AT 670 POUNOS PEF GAfLON Figure 6-l AIRPLANE WEIGHING FORM Original lssue I I ) LOCANNG PERCENT MAC FOAMUL | o-v SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE FUEL LOADING 2025.72 2062.19 2098.65 37.4E 74.92 112.32 149.68 187.00 2?4.24 261.53 298.75 335.93 373.07 410.19 2135.11 484.33 521.35 55E.37 595.3,1 4089.70 4125.08 2351_O2 4269.61 4413.71 4449.E6 743.00 779.89 816.77 853.62 890.46 927.27 964.07 2718.1-l 2154.52 2790.44 2427.15 2863.45 2899.73 2936.00 1000.85 2972_17 3008_34 1074.36 1t 11.09 1147.80 1184.50 1221.14 3044.50 3n80.65 3116.79 3152.92 1237 _45 3225.16 3261.27 3297.38 3333.47 3369.55 3405.63 3441.70 3r89.05 1294.51 1331.15 1307.78 1404.40 r '1.41.00 14f7.60 1514.21 1550.82 1567.41 1623.99 r733.66 '1770.20 1806.73 1643.25 1879.76 1916.26 1952.75 r 949 24 4522.13 {558.24 4594.34 4630.43 4066.52 4702.59 4738_66 4810.76 4846 80 48E2.43 4918.85 4954.86 4990.86 5026.84 5062.82 5098.80 5134.59 5170.39 5206.19 5242.00 u77.77 3513.83 5421.14 3585.92 3621.96 3658.00 3693.98 3729.95 3765.93 1697.11 4486.0r s2f7 _42 5313.04 5349.46 5385.30 35{9 88 1660.56 €05.60 4341.60 4377.60 26E1_42 i037.61 4197.64 4233.€3 2499_U 2536.26 2609.07 2645.45 70f.12 4t61.66 2403.41 2572.6f 632.29 669.22 4017.75 4053.72 2171.55 2208.00 2244.52 2241.03 2317.53 2390.50 2426.96 447.28 3945.80 3981.77 5457.00 5492.86 5524.72 5564.60 s600.48 5636.38 5 2.24 3801.91 5708.r9 3837.88 3073.85 3909.83 5780.05 5785.58 574412 I()TE OFuel weight based on 6.70 pounds/gallon. OFor additional fueL informatinn refer to Section 8. Figure 6-2 (Sheet 1 of 6) WEIGHT AND MOMENT TABLE 6-10 Original lssue SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 CREW. PASSENGERS AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS CREW AIO PAS3EMIERS CAROO OO||PARTTIIfT3 @i{TENT3 CNEW. PASSETOEBA A O CAROO COI|PARIXEIfTS XO*,IT Ant'|S Gtr| ww Tit m ww nTn w rTl w w w Figure 6-2 (Sheet 2 of 6) WEIGET AND MOMENT TABLE Original lssue 6-11 sEcTtoN 6 MODEL 406 WEIGHT AND BALANCE CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS IND TOflE TARMS CREW' PASSEIICEnS CAN@ CREW A}ID PAAS€MiEBS caBrt{Et arD canoo colrP^nl*$rTs @ "AFTIIEXTS COi{TEXTA Fisure 6-2 (Sheet 3 of 6) WEIGtrT AND MOMENT TABLE 6-12 Original lssue SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS CREW At{O PASSETIOERS CARGO COMPAATMENTS COXTENIS CREW, PASSENGEA At{O CAROO CO'iIPARTMEXTS MO EMTARHS mm tf !f i;t a;t tv !7 Figure 6-2 (Sheet 4 of 6) WEIGHT AND MOMENT TABLE Original lssue 6-13 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 CREW, PASSENGERS, CABINET AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS CREW AXD PASSENOENS CAR(IO COIPAETMENTS CO}IIEI{TS CREW, PASSE]{GER AT{D CARGO COUPARTTi,IEi{TS liloilEl{T ARli'lS Ficure 6-2 (Sheet 5 of 6) WEIGIIT AND MOMENT TABLE 6-14 Original lssue SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 CREW AND CARGO COMPARTMENTS CARGO COMPART EiITS CONTE}ITS can@ colrP^RruE Ts @ rExrs CREW AXD CABOO cofiP^a Exrs ottErr airrs Figure 6-2 (Sheet 6 of 6) WEIGHT AND MOMENI' TABLE Original lssue 6-15 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE 164 166 r6a 170 1t2 \71 176 173 rao 132 184 MODEL 406 136 810 12 14 16 1A 20 22 21 262A30 323-{ 36 3340 CENTER OF.GRAVITY - P€RCENT ]VAC 1672-2 Figure 6-3 CENTER-OF-GRAVITY_LIMITS ENVELOPE GRAPH 6-16 1 June 1988 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 WEIGHT MOMENT/ ITEM FUSELAGE PAYLOAD 100 CO[IPUTATIONS IVOMENT/ ITEM r00 OCCUPANTS 1 137.00 170 232.90 SEAT 2 137.00 170 232.90 SEAT 3 178.00 170 302.60 SEAT 4 178.00 170 302.60 SEAT 5 218.00 170 370.60 SEAT 6 218.00 170 370.60 SEAT 7 249.00 170 423.30 SEAT 8 249.00 150 373.50 SEAT SEAT 9 SEAT 1O SEAT 11 1. BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT 171.19 5190 8884.59 FUSELAGE PAYLOAD 1600 2793.60 ZERO FUEL WEIGHT WITH ZERO WING LOCKER PAYLOAD (sub-tolal) (Do not exceed weighr limil ot 8500 pounds) 6790 11,678.19 'Akplane CG 2, 3. 45. 6, : 200 422.00 1240 2241.03 8230 14,381.22 -60 -109.48 8170 14,271.74 -800 -1465.43 7370 12,806.31 WING LOCKER PAYLOAO FUEL LOADING RAMP WEIGHT (sub'tolal) (Do nol exce€d maximum ramp weight of 9435 pounds) 7, LESS FUEL FOR TAXIING 8.'.TAKEoFF WEIGHT (0o not exceed maximum tak€off weight ot 9360 SEAT 12 SEAT 13 'Airplan€ CG SEAT 14 : 173.77 9. CARGO O. AVTONICS 32.00 NOSE 71.00 CARGO A 170.00 CARGO B 197.00 CARGO C 224.O0 CARGO D 251.00 CABGO E 278.00 AFT CABIN FLOOR 281.00 260 184.60 LESS FUEL TO DESTINATION --LANDING WEIGHT (Oo not exceed maximum landing weight of 9360 "Airplane cG *Ai,pranecG : : 172.72 "SE58If* * too --Totals must be within approved weighi and cent€r_ofqravity limils. It rs the rosponsrbrlity of ths operator lo ;nsurb tnat tne a'rplane ia loaded properly. ih€ Basic Empty weight CG is nor€d on the Airplane weEhrng Form ll lh€ airplsn€ has been alt6rod, relerto theweEhl and Balanc€ Record for information. 301.00 BAY B Enler on lhe CenteFof-Gravity Limits Env€lope Graph to chock if within approved limils (shaded area). 317.00 CAAINET CONTENTS FUSELAGE 1600 2793.60 1672-A Figure 6-4 SAMPLE WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM 1 June 1988 6-17 SECTION 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 (CoNTINUOUS fTSTOBY OF CHANGES tN STFUCTUnE MODTFTCATTON OFI EOUIPMENT AFFECTINE WEIOHT ANO BALANCE) Figure 6-6 WEIGIIT AND BALANCE RECORD 6-18 Original lssue sEcTroN 6 WEIGHT AND BALANCE MODEL 406 EQUIPMENT LIST For a complete list of the required and optional equipment installed in the airplane as delivered from the manufaiturer, refer-to the equipment list furnished with the aimlane. WEIGHT AND BALANCE COMPUTATION FORM FUSELAGE PAYLOAD COMPUTATIONS ,I, BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT *Airplane SEAT 1 137.00 SEAT 2 137.00 cG : ZERO FUEL WEIGHT WITH ZERO WING LOCKER PAYLOAD (sub-total) (Do not exceed w€ight llmil ot 8500 pounds) SEAT 3 SEAT 4 WING LOCKER PAYLOAD SEAT 5 SEAT 6 SEAT 7 SEAI 6. RAMP WEIGHT (sub-total) {Do not 6xc€ed maximlm ramp weighl ol 9435 pounds) 7. LESS FUEL FOR TAXiING 8 SEAT 9 SEAT 1O 8. "TAKEoFF wEtcHr (Do nol exceed maximum takeoit weight ol 9360 SEAT 11 SEAT 12 *Airptane SEAT 13 SEAT 14 9. CARGO O. AVTONICS 32.O0 NOSE CG ..LANDING WEIGHT (Do not exceed maximum landing wsight oJ 9360 pounos) cc CARGO A 'Airptans CARGO B "Airprane cG : CARGO C CAAGO D CARGO E 278.00 AFT CABIN FLOOR 281.00 : LESS FUEL TO DESTINAIION to#58#oo " too ttToials must be wilhin approvod weight and center"o! gravity limits. ll lhe .espons,bility 01 lhe operator lo 's rs loaded properly. The Basc sflsure lhat ths airplane Emotv weioht CG rs noted on the ArrDlane weiohino Form. ll th€:irplane has been altered, reterto th€ W'erqhi and Balance Record for inlormation. 301.00 BAY B 317.00 1 June 1988 Enter on lhe Csnter-ol-Gravity Limiis Envelope Graph to check if within approved limils (shaded ar6a). 6-19 (6-20 blank) SFAR 41 MODEL 406 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEi'S sEcIoN 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION AIRFRAME FLIGHT CONTROLS Aileron System Aileron Trim System . Elevator Syst€m Elevator Trim System . Rudder System Rudder Trim System . INSTRUME}.IT PANEL . Overhead Console . Annunciator Panel .. FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS GROUND CONTROL Nosewheel Steering System Minirnum T\rrning Distance WINGFLAPS SYSTEM LANDINGGEAR.. Landing Gear Safety Switches Landing Gear Position Lights Landing Gear Warning Hom .. Page ....,..7-5. .....7-5 ...,,7-5 ...,.,..7-G ......,...7-7 ........7-8 .........7-9 .......7-10 ......,..7-11 ........7-74 ....7-14 ...7-15 .......7.T9 .... 7.20 .....'l-20 .....7-21 .......,,7.2I .....7-23 . . . 7-23 ....7-25 .....,,,.7-25 ...... 7 -26 Landing Gear Emergency Extension System . .....7-26 Landing Gear Shock Struts BAGGAGE COMPARTMENTS .... .,,.., 7-28 ........7-29 Cargo Loading SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SHOULDER HARNESSES . . . . . 7.30 ......7-30 Pilot and Copilot Provisions . . . . . . Passenger Provisions ..........7-30 ........7.31 DOORS,WINDOWSANDEXITS ...7-31 Cabin Door ....7-32 Crew Door .......... ?-33 Cargo Door .....7-33 Windows ..... 7-33 EmergencyExit/VentilationWindows .....7-34 CONTROLLOCK.. Original lssue - 1 July 1986 7-1 SECTION 7 MODEL 406 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page ENGINE Engine Controls Engine Instrumentation .. Engine Break-In Procedure Engine Oil System . Ignition System Air Induction System . Inertial Separator System Exhaust Systen Cowl Flaps Starting . Syst€m Engine Accessories . . . . . Engine Shock Mounts . Fire Detection and Extinguishing PROPELLER Overspeed Governor Test FUEL SYSTEM Fuel Tanks Drain Valves Fuel Indicating Systern Fuel Pumps Vent System System Switch . . FirewallShutoffValveSwitches Fuel Flow Gages . Fuel Quantity Gage .. Fuel L,evel Low Warning Lights . Engine Fuel Systenr . HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BRAKE SYSTEM ELECTRICALSYSTEM Battery . Battery and Generator Switches Generator Control Units Voltmeter and Ammeters Circuit Breakers, Switch Breakers and Fuses Spare Fuses AC Power Extemal Power Receptacle Crossfeed System .......7-34 .......7-35 ...'..7-38 ......7-39 "..7-39 ....'..7-39 ...'...'.7-40 '.,,..1-40 ..,....7-40 "",,'..7-42 .,.....7-42 '.,....7-42 ...,....7-46 .. '..,,.. 7-46 ... 7-46 ........7-48 ........ 7-48 ... 7-48 .........7-49 '.,".'.7-49 ...7-49 ."......7-53 '.... 7-53 ......... 7-54 ".'.7-54 .........7-54 ........7-54 ...7-54 .,....,.. 7-55 -57 .,..... .....,...7-57 .'.'. ?-58 7-58 '."....' ........7-59 .'.'... ?-59 ....... 7-59 7 ...7-59 ''" -62 ......7-62 7 Original lssue - 1 July 1986 SECTION 7 MODEL 406 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) Page LIGHTING SYSTEMS 7 -62 External Lighting Internal Lighting BLEED AIR SYSTEM HEATING, VENTILATING AND DEFROSTING '7 -62 SYSTEMS Cabin Air System . Heating and Defrosting Cabin Heat Controls . Cabin Air Controls . Air Duct Overheat Switch . TCTNGEQUIPMENT.. Propeller Deice System AVTONICS Avionics Interference Avionics Master Switches 1000 Audio Control Panel Locator Beacon 400 Marker Beacon . 400 Glideslope Nav/Com . Finder . ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR TRIM CABIN FEATURES .... Cabin Fire Extinzuisher Original lssue - 1 July 1986 7-66 ...7-68 ...' Ventilating System. . OXYGEN SYSTEM PITOT/STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEM Pilot's System Copilot's System . PNEUMATIC SYSTEM STALL WARNING SYSTEM 400 Automatic Direction 400 800 Yaw Damper 7-64 1...... . 7-68 7-68 ..""" '.".....7-68 .'.7-69 ."'.7-69 ...7-69 ..... 7.71 .... 7.73 ..'.....7-'13 .'...7-73 ......... ?-73 .....7-'15 .........'t-79 '.......- 7-79 .....7_75 ..' 7-80 ...'... ?-80 ..'...' 7-80 ....... ?-85 '..7-85 .'.....' 7-88 ..'..... ?-90 ........7-92 '..' 7-98 '...7-99 (7-100 blank) ..... 7-99 (7-100 blank) .....7-99 (7-100 blank) 7-3 sEcloN 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIBPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS MODEL 406 LIST OF FIGURES Figure Page 7-1 Aileron System 7-2 Aileron Trim System 7-3 Elevator System 7-4 Elevator Trim System 7-5 Rudder System . 7-6 Rudder Trim System ?-7 Instrument Panel . 7-8 Overhead Console 7-9 Annunciator Panel and Warning Lights . . . 7-6 . 7-7 7-8 7-9 . . 7-10 Nosewheel Steering System 7-11 Minimum Turning Distance 7-12 Wing Flaps System ?-13 Landing Gear SYstem ?-14 Emergency Blow Down Bottle Pressure Gage . . ' ?-15 Landing Gear Emergency Extension System . 7-16 Powerplant System . 7-1? Engine Air Flow 7-18 Propeller SynchroPhaser 7-19 Fuel System Schematic . . 7-20 Wing Fuel Hopper Tank Schematic ?-21 Hydraulic System Schematic 7-22 Hydraulic Reservoir Sight Gage ?-23 Electrical System Schematic ...... 7-24 l-ntt and Right Side Consoles 7-25 Cockpit Lighting and Controls . 7-26 Cabin Lighting and Controls . ?-2? Bleed Air Shutoff Valve 7-28 Bleed Air System Schematic ?-29 Cabin Air System Schematic ?-30 Cockpit Oxygen Outlets 7-31 Oxygen Duration Chart . . 7-32 Pitot/Static Pressure System ?-33 Instrument Air System Schematic ?-34 1000 Audio Control Panel . . . 7-35 Marker Facilities ?-36 400 Marker Beacon Indicator Lights . . 7-37 Glideslope Indicator ?-38 400 ADF Controls and Indicators 7-39 400 NAV/COM Controls Panel and Indicators 7-40 Yaw Damper . 7- 10 7- 11 7 -t2 7 -74 7 -20 7 -27 7 -2',1 7-36 7 7 7 -4r -45 -50 . . ' ' 7-57 ?-56 ....'.." .'..."7-57 . '.. ?-60 '........ 7-61 ...,..- -65 ..... ' '.. 7-65 ....'.'l-67 7 7 -67 7-70 7-7| 7-74 7 -76 7 -8r 7-86 7 -87 7-89 ?-91 7 -94 7-98 Original lssue - 1 July 1986 MODEL 406 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS INTRODUCTION its Section ? provides a description and operation of the airplane and s'stems' orE Operational procedures for optional systems and' equipment are presenled Ln sectton v AIRFRAME The Model 406 is an all-metal, Iow-wing airplane .The fuselage and empennaqe are of semimonocoque construction' Ihe wlng and nonzonurr of conventional aluminum construction' The ^^ .i'J ti?"ltiu-*.f""". -G;-I "." ""i which attach to tuqefa.ge at bulkhead spars ;ffi;t*;;; -fit"-""t"r -"i" panel iing has 2 main s.pars. which attach to the iJ"'":ii""i. sparc. rE" retractable hnding gear is a tricvcle ;;;;;;i";;";;bty design using oil-over-air gear shock struts. FLIGHT CONTROLS flisht controls consist of the ailerons, elevaton and rudder and The ''t".p?"ii* i.i- .vtt"-". All of these surfaces are constructed of ttt"i. aluminum and are statiaally mass balanced. Original lssue 7-5 sEcTtoN 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEIVIS MODEL 406 AILERON SYSTEM Each aileron, refer to Figure 7-1, is attached to the rear main wing spar at two points. The aileron is actuated by a bellcrank which is attached to a wheel in the wins. The wheel is actuated bv cables attached to lhe pilot's control w'heel. An aileron-rudder inteiconnect spring is incorporated to improve lateral stability. ,*-S A DETAIL DETAIL \- A 57603012P Figure 7-1 AILERON SYSTEM 7-6 A58611022 857611018 c51612017 Original lssue MODEL 406 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS AILERON TRIM SYSTEM to Aileron trim, refer to Figure 7-2, is achieved by-a trim-tab attached tab is trim The hinge piano-tvpe iengtfi d'ii *,J'il"n-iii"i6ii';i;i'-; jack tlpe screw tq is attached push-pull which rod ."i"ul"a tv a .a fitJ actuato. is driven bv cables attached to the liiiiiii ii' t["'*i"-elthe i;- "onttol knob oi cockpit control pedestal. DETAIL A DETAIL B 57603010P 4516r r043 8576110r9 or"r*oRtii#-',.".trt Original lssue 7-7 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS MODEL 406 ELEVATOR SYSTEM The two elevator control surfaces, refer to Figure 7-3, are connected by torque tubes. Each elevator assembly is attached to the rear spar of the horizontal stsbilizer at three points. The elevator assemblv is actuated by push-pull rods which ire attached to a bellcrank- in the empennage. The bellcrank is actuated by cables attached to the pilot's control wheel. DETAIL B 606330O2 A60631003 DETAIL 860621002 Figure 7-3 ELEVATOR SYSTEM 7-8 Original lssue MODEL 406 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEiiIS ELEVATOR TRIM SYSTEM Elevator trim, refer to Figure 7-4, is achieved by elevator trim tabs attached to the right and left elevators wilh q ful-l length piano-t1pe hinee. The trim ta6s are actuated by pushpull rods which are attached to dual iack screw t!'pe actuators in the horizontal stabilizer' The actuators ar,e d.iuen bv cabies attached to the trim control wheel on the cockpit control pedeital. DETAIL DETAIL C 60633001 454611016 B60e3r 0()1 I c57613041 nrrvnt6'ffdftiol""rtrt Original lssue 7-9 SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS MODEL 406 RUDDER SYSTEM The rudder, refer to Figure 7-5, is attached to the vertical stabilizer rear rnain spar at three points. The rudder is actuated by a bellcrank attached to the bottom of the rudder. The bellcrank is actuated by cables attached to the cockpit -to rudder pedals. A rudder-aileron interconnect improve fateral stability. spring is incorporated DETAIL A 60623@2 A54611010 860621tlo2 Figure 7-5 RUDDER SYSTEM 7-10 Original lssue SECTION 7 SYSTEI/|S ITS AND AIRPLANE THE OF DESCRIPTION MODEL 406 RUDDER TRIM SYSTEM tab attached to Rudder lrim, refer to Figure ?-6, is achieved pv a trim hinge' rhe piano-tvpe il;ff';i',h";dE*.-*i*''th,j"il;;; -n.,{ .1".'*t'aitached to.a-jack screw *hi"h-it push-pyii.md bv a i.li"'i"u l. i ".t"ut"d j*n'-inl*;l;Jl;rff ::t,':,f"'H:',jl*o*' :ffi f, :l'#i:;; jH" DETAIL A oeratl B 60623m1 A60621001 854611012 *,r""rtttiitfr-3trtr* Original lssue 7 -11 SFCTION 7 DESCBIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS MODEL 406 Figure 7-7 (Sheet 1 of 2) INSTRUMENT PANEL (TYPICAL) 7-12 Original lssue SECTION 7 DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS MODEL 406 trrerT Edd r--{ c, I J'a-, '1 3 ^ 5;H= 33LE!= - Hffi e r:d{ a .EatiE = - -:: E? - Ht x s EEce*ij EiiE.E=E€e siF#! Es;EriE;+s=;5€i{H{iiE €li:g:E$ H E i c.i ca E33 { $3f 3 E3i 33s 33 E 3i .O (l) c- @ o) O cD co cc .+ .rj cn ca c6 c.t 3 $E 93fr 33 i (O c- @ o) i c\ ca < r.J d N c. ! {J (o \ cO q) Q 4 L? ro ro ro ui rn La l.) ro ro (0 <) 'Indicates which wavpoint data (FRQ, RAD or DST) the inqement/decrement rotary switch will change FREQUENCY DISPLAY (FRQ) incremenls of .05 MHz. ' Displavs frequencv from 10800 to 11795 MHz in RADIAL DISPLAY (RAD) Displays ground station radial on which walpoint is located from 0.0 to 359.9 degtees. DISTANCE DISPLAY (DST) - Displays the offset disbnce of the wavpoint ftom the ground station over a range of 0.0 to 199.0 NM. RMI DISPLAY (Optional) (Not Shown) ' Displavs tbe besring to the walpoint/station' Consult the RMI Supplement 33 in S€ction 9 of this handbooL for additional informa7. WAYPOINT/MODE (WPT/MODE) CONTROL dual concentric knobs a. Th€ outer knob selects the MODE of unit operation. Turning the knob clockwise causes the mode to sequence thru VOR, VOR PAR, RNV, RNV APR and then back center knob selects the WPT to be disptaved Tuming the knob causes the displayed wawoint to incrcment by on€ thru th€ walpoint sequence of 1,2" 9'0,1' b. The Momentary pushbutton which' when pressed, causes the active watpoint to take on the same value as the displayed wawoint L USE BUTTON - Mornentary pushbutton which, when press€d, cauees the active wa,?oint to rcturn to the display L RETURN BUTTON (RTN) - RADIAL BUrION (RAD) Push on, push off button which, when pushed on, causes the remote DME to display the radial from ststion in VOR mode, or radial from wawoint in RNAV mode inslead of KTS, ald "F" (FROM) appeam inst€ad of MIN' CHECK BUTTON (CHK) - Moment€rv pushbutton which, when pressed, causes the mw radio data ftom the NAV Receiver and DME lo be displaved The radial from the VOn eround station will be displayed on th€ RAD displav and the distsnc€ from tlle shtio; will be dsplayed on th; DST display. There is no €ffect on anv other data output. 12. -- OFF/PULL ID CON'IROL - Rotarv *i"", power to the KNS-SI pulled"ppli". out to hear vOR ident. swttch/potentio-meter.which' when turn€d dmkincreases NAV audio l€vel The switch mav be ;nd Figure 1 King Area Nav (Type KNS-81), Kine DME Control/Indicator (Type KDI-5?2) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 2 of 5) 1 June 1987 SUPPLEMENT 25 3 of 11 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 13. DATA tsU'flON - Momentsry () <) display to change from pushbutton which, when prcssed, causes the caret FRQ to RAD to DST and back to FRQ. 14. DATA INPUT CONTROL - Dual .out" concentric knobs with the center knob havinq an "in" position. and FREQUIINCY DATA: The out€. knob varies the fr€quency from 108 lo 117 MHz in I MHz steps. The cent€r knob varies ftequency fmm .00 to .95 MHz in .05 MHz steps with the knob in iis "in" and 'out" position. RADIAL DATA: The outer knob va.ies the t€ns digit q'ith a carryover occuning from the tens to hundrcds position. The center knob in tbe'in" position varies the units digit and in th€ "out" position varies the tenths digit. DISTANCE DATA: 'l'he outer knob varies the tens digit with a canyover occurr;ng to hundreds plac€. The cent€r knob in the "in" position varies the units ftom the in the "out" position varies the t€nths digit. digit and "ens VORTAC,AMAYPOINT displayed in .l nauticsl mile increments up to 99.9 NM, then in increments of one nautical mile to 389 15. DISTANCE DISPI"AY DME distance to NM. 16. SELECTED MODE ANNUNCIATOR ' (1): NAV (20). 1?. Displays the DME operatins MODE; NAV 1 mode selector switch 2 (2); NAV r HOLD (1H); NAV 2 HOLD (H2) of the GROUND SPEED DISPLAY - Displays ground speed up to 999 knots. Gmurd speed is accurate only when flying directly to or ftom the station (VOR mode) or waypoint (RNAV rnode). 18. RNAV ANNUNCIATOR (RNV) 'Indicates RNV when displayed data is in r€lation to the RNAV walpoint. If the wrong DME mode is select€d during RNAV operation, th€ RNV annunciator will flash. r9. TIME-TO-STATION/WAYPOINT DISPLAY - Displays time'to-station (VOR mode) or time-to waFoint (RNAV mode) up tr] 99 minut€s. Time-to-shtion infomation is accurate only when flying dircctly to cr from the station or waypoint. 20. DME MODE SELECTOR SWITCH ' Applies power to the DME and selects DME operating modes as follows: OFF: Turns the DME Ot'F. Nav I (N1): Selecre DME op€mtion with No. selection by NAV I frequency selector controls. I VHF navisation seq enables chann€l Figure 1. King Area Nav (Type KNS-81), King DME Control/Indicator (Trpe KDI-572) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 3 of 5) SUPPLEMEN'T 25 of 11 1 June 1987 sEcloN 9 SUPPLEI\,'IENTS MODEL 406 HOLD (HLD): Selects DME memory circuiti DME remains channeled to station.to which it was last channeled when HOLD was sel€ct€d and will continue to displav information .elative to thjs channel Allows both the NAV r and NAV 2 navigation receivers to be set to new operational frequencies without affecting the pr€viou.ly selected DME operation. CAUTION h the EOLD mode there is no annunciation of the VOR/DME station frequency. However, an snnunciator, labeled "lH" or "H2"' illundinat€s on the DME display to flag tbe pilot thrt the DME k in the HOLD dode, RNAV will b€ inoperative wher on HOLD. NAV 2 (N2): Selects DME operation with No. 2 VHF navisation set; enabl€s clannel selection by Nav 2 frequeniy s€l€ctor switches. N2 must b€ select€d for RNAV operation if connect€d to NAV 2. NAV 1 must be selected for RNAV op€ration if connected to NAV 1. Brightness of the labels lor this swilch is controlled bv the radio lighi dimming 2t. COURSE INDEX Indicates select€d VOR/RNAV coune NAVICATION FLAG (NAV) - When visible, red NAV flas indicatrs unreliable VOR/RNAV/LOC signals or improperly operating equipment. Flag disappears when a 22. reliable VOR/RNAV,/LOC sisnal is being rec€ived TO-FROM 1NDICATOR Operates only wit}l a VOR or RNAV signal With usable VOR/RNAV signal, indicates whether selected course is "TO" or "FROM" station/walpoint. With usable localizer signal th€ indicator is not in view. 24. GLIDE SLOPE DEVIATION 25. NEEDLE lndicat€s deviation from ILS slide slope' COURSE DEVIATION POINTER RNAV course or localiz€r centerlin€ - Indicates couFe deviation from select€d omni or 26. RECIPROCAL COURSE INDEX - Indicat€s reciprocal or s€lecied VOR/RNAV course 27. OMNI BEARING SELECTOR 28. OBS COURSE CARD (OBS) Rotates OBS course card to select desired Indicates selectad VOR/RNAV couse under couse index' 29. GLIDE SLOPE FLAG (GS) - When visible, red GS fiag itidicat€s unreliable glide slope signal or improperly operating equipment- Flag disappea$ when a reliable glid€ slop€ signal is being received. 1. King Area Nav ('type KNS-81), King DME Contrcl/Indicator Figure - (Tlpe KDI-5?2) and Associaied CDI Controls (Sheet 4 of 5) SUPPLEMENT 25 1 June 1987 5 of 11 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENIS MODEL 406 30. BACK OOURSE LIGHT (BC) The 1000 autnpilot BC lieht (shown) will illumrnate amber when a localizer frequency is selected qs the active wa'?oint frequency and when back-course operation is selected by the BC (Back Course) mode selector pushbutton on the 1000 IFCS mode selector unit (if installed). BC lisht dimnins is available by th€ RADIO light dimmi.g rheostat. CAUTION WheD €otrn€cted to NAV 2 and back-cours€ operatiotr is selected, the cour€e (omDi) devistion bar (26) od the CDI will revers€ and cau6e the localizer si$ral to the autopilot to revefte for bsck-course operatioD. When contrected to NAV l, the IISI will not reverse but the localizer signal is reverEed in the sutopilot for bsck course oPeration. Figure 1. King Area Nav (T1pe KNS-81), King DME Control/Indicator (Type KDI-5?2) and Associated CDI Controls (Sheet 5 of 5) 1 June 1987 sEcloN MODEL 406 9 SUPPLEMENTS SECTION 2 LIMITATlONS The following RNAV IFR approach limitation must be adhered airplane operation. OPERATING LIMITATION: 1. IFR Approaches -- Follow approved published RNAV instrument proceoures. SECTION 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this avionic equipment ig installed. sEcTloN 4 NORMAL PROCEDURES PREFLIGHT: AREA NAVIGATION FUNCTIONAL TEST: The following procedure applies only to ai4orts equipped with, or in range of, a collocated VOR/DME station. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- TURN ON MODE Control -- SELECT VOR mode. DME FUNCTION Switch -- SELECT N1 or N2 depending on svstem selected. OBS Knob - SET so needle is ccntered with "FROM" indicationRAD Display -- ENTER a waypoint radial angle equal to the OBS value determined in step 2. DST Display -- ENTER a walpoint distance equal to the indicated DME value. '| June 1987 SUPPLEMENT 25 7 ot 11 SECIION 9 MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENTS ?. MODE CONTROL 'SELECT RNV mode. The KNS-81 is operating properly 1,0 NM and the couBe deviation if the DME distance to wa5point is less needle rs within a dot of being centered. PROGRAMMING: Pe inent information (walpoint number, station frequency, waypoint radial, and walpoint distance) for up to ten walpoints is entered into the memory. Programming may be completed prior to takeoff or during flight. Any combinatiorr of navigational facilities (RNAV wal4roint, VOR/DME, ILS) may be loaded the computeq however, it is desirable that each facility be numbered and in rhe sequence in which it is to be used. V WAYPOINTS: t. OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- TURN ON. 1 2. WPT CONTROL Knob -- SELECT watpoint 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. either direction to get "1". DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT frequency for walpoint 1. DATA Button -- PRESS to move > ((caret) from FRQ to RAD. DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT radial fo. waypoint 1. DATA Button -- PRESS to move ) ( (caret) from RAD to DST. DATA INPUT Control -- SELECT distance for walpoint 1. SEQUENCE 2 thru 7 -- REPEAT for all the waypoints desired up to a maximum of t€n. Turn the knob in NOTE VOR and ILS data are entered in a similar manner except, RAD and DST entries are not required. INFLIGHT USE: OFF/PULL IDENT Control -- PULL ON. DME FUNCTION Switch -- SELECT Nl or N2 depending on system 1. 2. selected. WPT CONTROL Knob -- ROTATE as required to select the desired wa5rpoint number. The waypoint iaformation (frequency, radial, and distance) associated with the WPT number will be displayed in their 3. respective displays. WAYPOINT Display (WPT) -- OBSERVE that WPT is blinking indicating that the waypoini is a preview waypoint and noi the active waVDolni. SUPPLEMENT 25 of 11 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 DATA INPUT Control '' SEI FRQ, RAD, and DST as desired preview walpoint is to be rnodified' NOTE it is lhe active walpornt the data input tFRQ' by Jr'r' pr*i"*'*r'l""int. will be affecr€d control. DST) and RAD, Only the displayed waypoint. wherher 6. RETURN gn1161 (RTN) -' PRIISS to the active walPoint number' if it is desircd to return the displav NOTE 7. until The wawoint conrrol knob may also be manually rolated usrng the activl waj|poinl, number is again displayed ln lreu ol the RTN Pushbutton. (blinking WPT) USE Button -- PRESS if it is des ed to place preview f ",'iiifi iT'd1'.t*-utthat.wPrisnot 8.fi " iily"#tri?r'ilt3""ffactive waJ&oint- is now displaled' 910. i.ilcatfi tut the ,--- *mode navigation i;?H;'i.;;;;":--JELEcr ii"i'"a o"pp.ropiiate PRESS ir ihe.radial rrom the ii;fi;;;;1;;" iruol be displaved on the DME knots displav wi i"ai"r ir'" dd]JJ il;i""; station display' "i".g ",ltft ar "F' on the DME time to NOTE The radial switch (RAD) is noi the momentary tJPe' therefore' DME informath" -,r"i Lt pt".t"a again for the normal "*ii"n tion to be disPlaYed. 11. 12. oBS Knob -- sELEcr desired course the raw VoR and DME data rs be displaved in thetAD will vOn ti," X*i"*1.^t-r'""t"iriii-'displav be displaved in the DST displav' will VOR ;;;'.t,e ;ilE;tJ;n"" tn tt " CHECK Button (CHX) -- PRESS KNS-81 OPERATIONAL NOTES: -l. rhe bv VOR MODE OPERATION -- VOR mode is selected of the 'turning wa}pornt left to the ff4Onf .."t."f knob until VOR is displl{ed is automat',callv tuned when ;;;b"". i; voR mode, the remote dMb via the N1 or, N2 position source ln"'if',f S-sf is selected as the iuning di"t"o""' ground speed and time to The course the VORTAC station rs displayed "n the DME display ." tit" nVfe indicator' Upon iu"k-o't' SUPPLEMENT 25 1 June 1987 9 of 11 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS 2. MODEL 406 deviation indicator displays conventional anzular crosstrack deviation from the selected course (110" fir.ll scale). Duiing VOR mode operation, the RAD and DST displays show dashes. VOR PARALLEL MODE OPERATION -- VOR pARALLEL mode is selected by turning the MODE control knob uniil VOR pAR is disolaved to the left of the waypoint number. If the syst€m is receiving valid signals from a collocated VOR-DME facility, this mode provides a con_ stant cou$e width irrespective of the distance from the VORTAC and normal DME information fu displayed on the DME indicator. The cours€ deviation indicator displays t5 NM full scale from the select€d course. The RAD and DST displays show dashes during operation in the VOR PAR mode. NOTE a This mode of operation is primarily used when the pilot desires to fly a constant cou$e width io either side of the selected VOR course. By flying a VOR parallel course, the pitot is able to stav up to a maximum of 5 NM to either side of the selected VOR will not track a VOR offset parallel course, but will track the selected base course in course. The Sperry 1000 or IFCS autopilot the parallel mode of operation. . It ie recommended that either the VOR mode or RNV ApR of the VOR pAR mode for approach. This procedure is recommended because the resolution of an off mode be us€d instead corrrse indication increases qrith decreasing distance to the sta_ tion in standard VOR mode and a tightei resolution of 11.25 NM erists in the RNV APR mode, but the resolution remains constant ( +5 NM tull scale) in the VOR pAR mode. 3. 4. ENROUTE RNAV MODE OPERATION -- ENROUTE RNAV MODE is s€lected by_ tuming the MODE control knob until RNV is displayerl to the right of the wa5rpoint number. If the system is receiving vali'i Jignals from a collocated VOR-DME facility, tliis mode providJs a constant, course width and DME information to the walpoint. The course de_ viation indicator displays 15 NM full scale from iie selected course. RNAV APPROACH MODE OPERATION __ RNAV AppROACH mode is by turning MODE control knob until RNV ApR is to the nght ot-the the waypoint number. If lhe system is receiving valid signals from a collocated VOR-DME facility, this mode provides i constant course width and DME information to the wayp;int, The course deviation indicator displays a I l/4 NM full scaie from the selected course. For RNAV approaches, the RNV ApR mode is normally selected prior to final approach cou$e inl,erception. selected orsprayeo SUPPLEMENT 25 10 of 11 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 ILS an MODE OPERATION -- ILS mode is selected bv selecting 5. " ILS frequency ILS an Whenever il;t;;;; f." the active wavpoint frequencv the same -rem-ains is the actrve wayporn! lrequency' the mode display RAD and DST the 6rt APR) nxv iiriC* ?tii, vo'fi ian, dNv oi is p::]-id"d i" deviation angula{ conveniional onlv )irri.u" *"'Lr-t"d. "tull scale deviation from course ce.nterline is ;l:"Tii ;ili;;;inal and t0'7ofor. the glide slope)' localizer at -o"i-lo*tiottt t2.5ofor the "a""i"tlon tfr"""o*t" 6'6,';;;til pointer function can be reversed for back course pushtutton on the il lr'! eA'cr cRS mode. selector Absence of^thc LOC/GS 1000 IFCS rDode s€lector ii"*f""Ji" ""t""".tea u"'t Uv tfre if in"tatt"at NeV and GS flags in the CDI or HSI' sEcTloN 5 PERFORMANCE when this 11i.11t:^"qutpt""' There is no change to the airplane performance t. t"#ft'd.'"i;il"*:-th;;{1"'-'"*tAl'tii"ltr"T*e'jl.i::"il""1"*";"i?"*X:"":' related eaterDal antcnnas, wrlMgulr 1 June 1987 SUPPLEMENT 25 11 of 11 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENT KING AUDIO CONTROL PANEL (Type KMA-24H-70) sEcTloN 1 GENERAL The King Audio Control Panel (Type KMA-24H-70) is- a compact solid unit containi-ng all operating conlrols on the front of the unit' There are two control knobs on the far left of the panel for intercom control, ten push button switchee on the top center of the palel for speaker audio c ten push button switches on the bottom center of -the panel for phone ol -d two control knobs on the far right of the panel for a "o.rt function Mic s€lect gwitrh and a spea.ker auto switch. The electrical power required for operation of the audio- cofitrol panel's headphone and/or speaker functions is supplied by RH AVIONICS BUS through a 'p,-tlt-off type circuiL breaker labeled AUD PRI. TNTERPHONE (INTERCOM SYSTEM) The interphone system consists of a hot mic volume control and an intercom VOf ivoice) sensitivity control which are controlled by the two control knob€ ou the far left of ihe panel. The inner control knob controls the intercom ouly and does not affect the other inputs. .The-outer tontrol .fnob,1|en to the detent position provides hot mic operation When rotated n iii i^ 1."-oa iha L".l' selects Relecls intercom VOX (voice) sensitivity range, the control midde to ihe"f""f.t* -iear. "^';'.1 knob the voice activated intercom aud'io knob adjusts u"a ltt" rotation oi this control level. SPEAKER/PHONE (COM/NAV/DME/MKR & ADF) MONITOR PUSHBUTTONS The audio panel incorpolates in the center of the panel two rows of ten Dushbutton switches, Iabeled SPEAKER on the top row and labeled PHONE on ifi" bott rrr row. These pushbuttons permit the pilot or copibt to monitor the va"ioue c;nutu"l"utions and navigation systems available.to the.operator' When depressed, each pushbutton connects ita respective na-vrgatlon ancl/or commumcato ;ither the sp€ater (top row of pushbuttons) or the headphones llJo "yst€(bottoia row of pushbuttons). To disconnect a communication or navigation system from eithe; the sp€aker or headphones, depress the desired pushbutton a second tiure. 1 June 1987 SUPPLEMENT 26 1of 5 sEcTtoN I MODEL 406 SUPPLEI\4ENTS Mrc SELECT SWTTCH (TNCLUDTNG EMG, pA & EXT pOStTtONS) A multiple function MIC selector control swikh is located on the far right of tfie parel and is the inner confol knob. In the COM position (1 thru 4), microphone and audio keying are routed to the gelect€d tralsceiver and the speaker amplifier is connected to the cockpit speaker. In the PA position, keyed microphone audio is rout€d to the aft cabin speakers for passenger address. The EXT (erternal ramp hail speaker) position is not uged in this install,ation. In the EMG position, the microphone and headphones are connected directly to COM 1 aa a means of failsafe communications in the event of a failure within the Audio Control Parel or on the RH AVIONICS BUS. SPEAKER AUTO SELECT SWITCH The SPKR AUTO selector control is located on the far rieht of the Danel and is the out€r coDtrol knob. When rhe SPKR AUTO switchls oulled out. it will automatically s€lect the audio from the transceiver selected bv the MIC seiect switch to be heard on the cockpit spea-ker. sEcTtoN 2 LIMITATIONS There is no change to the airplane limitations when t}lis avionic equipment is installed. lf'"??rr""t rt 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 KMA-z4II-7O AUDIO CONTROL PANEL r'voxRELEASEADJUSTMENT-TheVoXrleasepotisAcc$s;blethmuehIhe,maj| ' i"'i"'i"-,r'" i.;* left corna of rhp fr nr Danel clockwise sdju'tment wrrr rncrease rne ended vOX release should be rime that the intercom remarns t" "ii"t'"p""ttt has adjusted to suit user Prcferenc€' 2 r NrERcoM jn"f*'t: rvorcE,, sENS''j$II.SllT,[".'.;,]:fl ;" \l.'"'"ff, posrtio'j".i l:1-1i*^1". adiusrs rhe sensilivitv ol the vorce activaLed vox clo{k',,ise detlnr vii,ilili"r'f !':,:1ii;:."?"{1:ir::hril;1{;rt*nt.si**rl*'r::llxl :i"'#tr;it'-"".lliilf.Tl$fl ":hiift ,ri"l,iL,"*"axr'J",fl power lffi::I":fi: i.ffi:"lfii: il"['il:;:; ;#;;;' ;;"h';; wlen marine rarse'1""'I: changes. rNrERcgM vor-uMx cglllgl T"ln:'F:il":ij:ffi -,TIt,ll,T"i?"jir*ffiIifl: contn l. This adjusts the intercom vorume wlen either the pilot or copilor' kc)s the microphone 10 trangmrr' ;""";;;;;l;;rr" '*":ilr";s::,ntlm[1ru'*s.:'lr:$* :nn'li' i:: I;l;'oi'ffi"i*:: (SPEAXER) - Select^r buhons for speaker SPEAKER AUDIO SELECTOR BUT'|ONS op"iuto-it i"f"cl anv onc or more audio sisn'ls ardio outDut when press€d tn "nuo'"" a sF ond Irme To disconnect, depress lhe pushburbn SPEAKER AUro.swrTcl.:Jh:' .pY.il-:*;i:l".";TiTllll ;'J":i:','Jf ixl*ii:1.*::59":t\::"T't'*,il'i'1r:l'i;;'""ir"r' i",i*'v" $i;iJll"'.I: h;ard on th€ head' phones. Control Syst€m Operating Controls Fizure - 1. King Audio (Sheei 1 of 2) SUPPLEMENT 26 1 June 1987 3of5 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 MIC SELECT SWITCH (Including EMG, PA and EXT posftions) - tn the EMC (Em€ rg€.ncy ) posit _ ion, microphone 6udio, mircrophone key and headphones are conto COM L This providee failssle iornmunications in th; event of Audio Panel Failure. In COM positions (1 ttrru 4), microphone audio ard keying is connected to the appropdat€ transmitter and audio from the ielected receiver wili be heard on tne spealer wlen the AUTO SPKR kDob is pdted ouL tn the pA positioo. keved micronect€d directly phone audio is loyted- to lhe aff. cabin speakels for passenger address. The is noDfirnctional in this instr_Uation. Dudng trgnsmit all received audio sidetone froE the select€d tlamEitt€r is h€rd on spesler and phones. E*T i! posrion mut€d and HEADPHONES AIJDIO SELECTOR BUITONS (PHONE) - Setector buttons for hesdpbon€ audio output. When pressed in, enabl€s headphone operation to anv one or 1. more aucuo sBnals. 't o disconnect. depress rhe pushbutton(s) a second time. Figure 1. King Audio Control System Oprerating Controls (Sheei 2 of 2) SECTION 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES . There is ao c-bange to the airylane emergency procedures when this avionic equlpment lI} rnst€Ied. NOTE a This tlpe of audio control palel has independent. citcuits for speak€r and headphone functions. Thus, one failure does nol of both headphone and speaker audio. In case of failure to tlansmit over the headset MIa, the operator mav still be able to transmit using the hand-held MIC. (The hand-mike jack is connected in parallel with the copilot,s headset jack. For better modulation and less background noise, unplug- the co_ pilot's headset when using the hand_held MIC.) cause the loss a IF a complete failure of the audio conhol pan€l occurs. Dlace the MIC select switch in the EMG posirion. The micropione and headphones will be connected directly to COM 1 ag a meaIrs of failsafe communications. SUPPLEMENT 26 4of5 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 sEcTloN 4 NORMAL PROCEDURES AUDTO CONTROL PANEL OPERATIONS: 1, MIC Select Switch -- SELECT desired conmunications transcerver (COM 1, 2, 3 or 4 position) for.transmitting' pri6itn rfrvlrD .q'di" .qeleci Button(s).;, l-ElE93 bi"diribii aro/or 2, - SPtlAl$j}( ""ili,i ,l""i"ed, svsi"m 6bi,i7iln -- to rngurtgl audio-over :t!hi: llti:lT:i pushbutitip'i"*'"r i'""rtU"rtt"")- ttt" tt*dpnooes (bottom row of s. tons). Selector Knob -- PULL recerver' commurtications selected on audio b"P;iKEn AUTO il;"t;;i#il7* ine level. 5. 6. t?;;;;" oUT for automatic speaker n"""iu". euaio Control -- ADJUST to desired listen- INTERCoM VoL Control -- ADJUST to desired level while u.sing hot mic. i'Litdi'6'6tr"ibx (voi-cetsensitivirvcontrol--Rpr.ArE-c-o-Y1g^! and then adjust as required ilif'"i;."#;; ii'"' -iJar"- '-ei -ml'ercom' desired voice activation of hot mic SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE when this avionic There is no change to the airplane peformance is installed. SuPPLEMENT 261 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENT KING DIGITAL ADF (Type KR-87) sEcTloN I GENERAL automatic direcThe King Digital ADF is a panel-mounted' digitaU-y -l-kHz-tuned tunins in the digital pio"icle continuous to l"'d""ig""d ti." ;;l;;.-li nechanical or zoolln, t" iigg-tir" -a etminat€s th9. r9ed.fot H;;;;;& tinet' a built-in electronic i?"'i""*it"-rtit'* ihe "y"t"m i" "o-ptit"a of a -receiver' and roop ra-aae'"'.uined #J. - u(drrr'ts uurwqw" itJ".'lii*riiaii",ii a TIT Kl-227 Kl-228 or be a TPll1?,T*t:g ' on the avionics optioDs installed' ih" indi""toi canDigital are.shown and AIF King tot the oopUl" and KI-229. Operating controls i##Jil'ii*t r- rt " ",dio rv"ti- *ecl.ioin"9"r"',:!i9l.T1-t[T^T*%f:l supplement 26 in section e il ]JllHfi#;;1fti";i.-.;";;tJ;ribecl this handbook. can- be us€d for position plotting and homing of amplitude-modulated (AM) signals' reception a,r."".-arrd for" auril The KiIg Digital ADF proce- The "flip-flop' frequencv displav allows tyit"li"c" -b,:1:T1 by pressing tr': lr-equ:i:v llTl:.: ---'-"" "sririibs.il"*i1,Aciil,E;-i."q";;;ies in a non-volatile nemory circuit a ftequencies pre-selected ton. Both "tot"i '''i"""i'.1'""l"".iu*ii-J"a-al'pi"v"ainselr-dinminggas^g:i*"iH"*T; fr while the ii'"o"ti""''ltii aitplaved in the Ieft window'readout t"ff;it#;;;il fro from selected the or fiequency Jri disPlaY ai*f"" either the standbv window -i.i^- will built-in electronic timer. The built-in electrcnic timer has two separate ang,indeq:n9€:l unit. is J1ilg on' the .tumed ti""": i"r;";;;;; mgilitr."i-titti ttutt" *tt"tt"u"" timer el:Fsed An timer functions up to 59 houls "oi-sg titt"t"t' -wlich q""""t r- "o *" ss '.ninutes and 59 seconds ryl"l, :1ffi " ilis^-plaJ :00' reaches, int€rval has b€en progtammed anJ the countdotvn ,the uott' the fligrt timer .and :tfg':1,11T",1 ro.,cPExuvuurr' '" ^' r-":"'"'- '-"' -:-la"ing ilfr io,fic"to"" are internally lighted. "lo#i",irir,'it^":d;;;-;;"il.;,t':r1T_T:lTi^g:"T1,,,*e,:*"ljlT conlrols and l,ne or. il."#il; ;;:i'?;t;;fu."si""" The pushbutton "iiv i! "."t".it"a 1 June 1987 Uv the radio light dimming rheostat' SUPPLEMENT 27 1of 8 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENIS MODEL 406 12ilt0$ KI.227 INDICATOR KI.229 OPTIONAL RMI INDICATOR 14 ro 15 Kt-228 tNDtcAToR Figure 1. King Digital ADF Operating Controls and Indicaton (Sheet 1 of 3) SUPPLEMENT 27 2ol 8 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 (ANT) is selert€d bv the'out" position of.the ADF' MODE ANNUNCIATION -"iJ" i'"p"ovesAntenna for statioo identhe auret r"ception and is usuallv used tiiti"l rli" g0orelative positioD' is deacrivate; and will park in tbe ii"niii"". ft'" be*r"e'point€r bv the depressed positioD of .thc ;i,ffi;;i Dt'Ji"" 'Filder (ADF) mode is select€d bcains poinr'er'.The bearins point€r will pt rnt in Lirilii*t. rf';" -"ae activales ihe ii"-dlteciio" of th" st"tion rclative to the airplane heading' ACTn'E FREQTIENCY DISPLAY - The freqxencJ to which.rhe PF."*-P]* " b" changed direcllv when eitler or the ;ip';fi il;;*Th; ;;tl'e eor r'"q*ncv "ar timer functioru are sPlected. The B{O modg' activated.and arTlunBEAT FnEQUENCY -"neo"OSCILLATOR (BFO) -pernits the carrier wave and associated button i! depressJ' iit i *l*-trt" mors€ code identiier broadcast on lhe csrrier wave lo lr€ beam' NOTE audio :vill :b: hea:d CW sisnals (Morse Code) are unmodulat€d and no t}re Unit€d Stat€e air itFd. This'tlpe of sisnal is noi used in ;h"fi;; t"ig"ii-. ri"ii" .*a i. some foreigrr countries and msrine beacons' - when Fx,Q -is displav€d the Jhe STANDBY rreouencv displav bsnd rislt in rhe displaved il;"}cvls 3+fr6;i STANDBY, frequency is put seleded Tbe knobi setecr trequ""cy trre *i"i i^""r""r"apresing the flequencv transfet button (FRQ) STANDBY FREQUENCY ANNUNCIATTON ilt" ,qCffvt i-1" f."qtencv window bv tr€quenry' tbe nisht rimer' STANDBY FREQUENCY DISPLAY - Either rhe stsndbv timer.and elapsed tiEer,a-re iJ ii. ifitje€d.li-l- r' aisplaved in this position Tbe flisht blind Bemory r'"q""oiv i*"-;'ito T td&-itt ti#;ff;"il"; "i'i"r !r back at snv trEe bv depressrng rne r rtQ button Flig,llt,lire displsyed and anlruDciat€d alt€rnslively by depresstng In€ rLtlr I F-g'd llme 3r€ ^etapsed uuL@n' (ET) or flight time (FLT) TIMER MODE ANNUNCIATION - Either the elapsed time mode 7. i.s alnunciated herc. st€ndbv .ftPqu€ntv when.FRQ ts FREQUENCY SELECTOR NNOBS -- Selects the either of the timer Nnctnns c'/henever tseduencv sctite l.be ait".rlv ai"pta-v"a ana either.clockwi "elecis rotaled be knobs'mav s€lector ftequency i"- iJi"t"a..'fft" knob ;s pulled out.rn t"ne the.l's Tbe "P+ T,"b,:""Xyrl:l rh*e tun€s the I00's with rollover-into thejaltuos t-i-" *" rbt Tte oui€r kn;bdu"ired r*€d rn tne eLaps€d iimer lh€ wben iime tle s.l il;-;-d;-G-; - ;'ilil;;. il" ;;ii poT'.:{-l:]9-: ;ly'i ' controls primary power l'o i-- oFF.position appliee.primarv ,receivex..frrther -irii.' ca'$ei tbe audio output t,o b€ clockwise rotation rncreases &uttro t"u"t lua;6't"ti'"g oFF/voLUME 'ciiil; coNIRoL (oFF/vOL) il;: ii,t"J ual"ss rb" re"eiuer is locked on a valid st'ation Fieure 1. Kine Disital *,#i";""t;ti and rndicators """"ols SUPPLEMENT 27 1 June 1987 3of8 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SE1'/RESET BUT'TON (SET/RST) elapsed timer wherher - The set/reset it is being d)splayed or nor. button when D.essed resets rh€ FLIGHT TIME/ELAPSIID TIME MODE SELECTOR BUTTON GLT/ET) The Flight Time./Elaps€d Time mode selector button wben pressed altemarely selects either Flight Tim€r mode or Elapsed Time. mode FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON (FRe) - The FRe transfer button when Dressed erchanges the active and standby frequencies. The new frequency becomes active ard me former aciive frequency goes into standby. BFO BUTTON - The BFO button position. (See note under item 3.) selects the BFO mode when in the depressed ADF BUITON - The ADF button selects either the ANT mode or the ADF mode. The ANT mode is selecied with the ADF burton in the out position. The ADF mode is selected with the ADF button in the dep.essed posirion. INDEX (ROTATABIE CAR.D) , Indicates r€lativ€, nagnetic, or true heading of air- plane, as selected by HDC control. POINTER_- Indicatps station bearing in desrees of azimuth, rclative to the nose of me alrplane. when headins conrrcl is adjusrad, indicat€s rehtive, Dagnetic, o. rrue beanng 16. ITEADING CARD CONTROL Deanng rnronnatron. (HDc) Rotat€s card to s€t in relative, magnetic, or rrue 77. DOUBLE-BAR POINTER - Indicat€s bea.ing of selected ADF station. I8. HEADING INDEX - Indicates the ai.plane masnetic heading on the azimuth card. 19- ROTATING AZIMUIH CARD Slaved to remore heading source; mtates as th€ airplane .turns so that the airplane magnetic heading is contiruously displayed at me Figure 1. King Digital ADF Operating Controls and Indicators (sheer 3 of 3) SUPPLEMENT 27 4ofB 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SECTION 2 LIMITATIONS There is no change to ihe airplane limitations when this avionic is installed. sEcTloN 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this equipment is installed. SECTION 4 NORMAL PROCEDURES TO OPERATE AS AN AUTOMATTC DIRECTION FINDER: 1. OFF/VOL Control .. ON. i. F""qu".t"y Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in the frequencY disPlaY. --3. FRb Bu;ton FRESS to move the desired frequency from the active Position. to t}le-SinafnR/PHONE Selector Pushbutton(s) Switch (on audio cona. abf trol panel) -- SELECT as desired. Control -- SET to desired volume level' 5. OFFTVOL e. ebf gtit"t -- SELECT ADF mode and note relative bearing on indicator. ADF TEST (PRE-FLIGHT OT IN-FLIGHT): 1. ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode and note pointer moves 90oposition. pointer moves 2. ADi'Button -- SELECT ADF mode and not€ pointer sluggishness' hesitation to the station bearing. Excessive n weak or a system malfuncing ins or reversals indicate a signal that is loo weal tron. TO OPERATE BFO: 1. 2. OFF/VOL Control -- ON. BFO Button -- PRESS on. SUPPLEMENT 27 1 June 1987 50Td SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS 3. 4. MODEL 406 ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) SET to desired mode. VOL Control - ADJUST to desired listeninE level. NOTE A 1000-Hz tone and Morse Code identifier is heard in the audio output when a CW sigral is received. OPERATE FLIGHT TIMER: 1. 2. 3. OFF/VOL Control -, ON. FLT/ET Button -- PRESS (once or twice) until FLT is annunciated. Timer begins counting at takeoff and "holds" at touchdown. OFF/VOL Control -- OtrF and then ON if it is desired to reset the flisht tlmer. OPERATE AS A COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER ONLY: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. OFF/VOL Control -- ON. ADF Button -- SELECT ANT mode. Frequency Selector Knobs -- SELECT desired frequency in the staldby frequency display. FRQ Button -- PR"ESS to move the desired frequency from the Btandby to the active position. ADF SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -SET to desired mode. VOL Control -- ADJUS'I to desired listening level. OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER.COUNT UP MODE: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. OFF/VOL Control - ON. FLT/ET Button -- PRESS (once or twice) untit FLT is annunciated. SET/RST Buttoq - PRESS until the ET annunciation besins to flash. SET/RST Butr,on -- PRESS to start timer. SET/RST Button -- PRESS to stop time!. Timer will reset zero. When the SET/RST button is released the timer will start to count asain unless the SET/RST bu+tpn is held until the ET annunciation flashei. NOTE The Standby Frequency which is in memory while Flight Time or or Elapsed fime modes are being displayed may be called back by pressing the FRQ button, then transfered to active use by pressing the FRQ butLon again. SUPPLEMENT 27 6of8 1 June 1987 sEcroN 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 TO OPERATE ELAPSED TIME TIMER-COUNT DOWN MODE: 1. 2. 3. 4. OFF/VOL Control -- ON. fiiini g"fio" -- PRESS (once or tq'ice) until ET is annunciated' sei'/RSt Srtt"" -- PRESS until the ET annunciation begins to flash' FREOUENCY SELECTOR KNOBS -- SET desired time in the e tge. the 1's' Thc li-" ii"pf"v. The small knob is pulled out tqknob tunes minutes up inoU i" io"it"a in io tune the 10's. The outer 59 minut€s. NOTE after Selector knobs remain in the time set mode for 15 seconds ift"-i..i "tt"v is pressed. or until the SET/RST, FLT/ET or FRQ button SET/RST Button -- PRESS to start couutdown' When the i"""fr"" o, it will start to count up as display flashes for 15 seconds' NOTE Wirile FLT or ET are displayed, the active frequency on the left the frequency side of the window may be changed by using gtored st€ndby lreselector knobs, wiihout any effect on rhe queucy or the other modes. ADF OPERATIONAL NOTES: PHENOM' ERRONEOUS ADF BEARING DUE TO RADIO FREQUENCY ENA: United States, the FCC, which assigns -AM radio frequencies' occaIn the an area' *'lff- u".ign the s"ame frequency Lo more than one- station, in sl'ations to from such stations ftom signals cause may "iotruiiu bff""i, Night Night as i:iilii such Certain conditions, "".iiti."-".. ^"v when using AM broadcast iftft should be take; in; consideration .r"tf"r. station for navigation. phenomena may occasionally -distort reception so Sunspots -Jig"li" - and atmospheric For this overlap. f".- t*o stations on the same frequency will of. the- station being identification positive make io wise alwavs is ;;;;:"it i"iJ,'U" "Ut"n"iJ the tunciton selictor to ANT and listening for station call lett€rs. tft"t SUPPLEMENT 27 1 June 1987 7 oII SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 STORMST In the vicinity of electrical su)rms, an ADF indicator pointer tends to swin€i from the station tuned toward the center of the storm. NIGHT EFFECT: This is a disturbance particularly strong just after sunset and just after dawn. pornter may swing indicator pointer An AlJl Ar ADF {DF mdrcator swrng erratlcally possible, erraticallv at these times. lf erratically If possible, oossible. tune to the most powerful station at the lowest frequency. If this is not possible, take the average of pointer oscillations to det€rmine relative station bea ng. MOUNTAIN EFFECT: Radio waves reflecting from the surface of mountains may cause the pointer bearing. This should be taken into accouni when taking bearings over mountainous terrain. to fluctuate or show an erroneous COASTAL REFRACTION: Radio waves may be refracted when passing from land to sea or when moving parallel to the coastline. This also should be taken into account. SECTION 5 PERFORMANCE There is no cbalge to the airplane performance when this avionic equipment is installed. However, the installation of an externally mount€d antenna or related ext€rnal ant€nnas, will regult in a minor reduction in cruise performance. SUPPLEMENT 27 8of8 '| June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENT KING DIGITAL COMM (Type KY-196) SECTION 1 GENERAL The King KY-196 Digitat Comm, Shown in Figule 1' c.oLsrsls of a nanelmounted receiver-tlansmitter. The set includes a ?20-channel Vtt! communrca1 iio""- t"""it"*tt-"mitter which receiveg and transmits signals between and 135.975 MHz with 25-kHz spacing' KY-196 hae four modes of operation: Frequengy mode; Channel mode; The mode ol Freouencv mode o-^-^*-r-- mode; mode' The Frequency T\rning mode. Direct T\rninc ---i Programming Channel -^i.. r)irorr frequency standby in ihe frequency tune a aUt" ihe;ilot to .-i 6.tiua franrrpnnips- The Channel mode -':';i....- j1^-- li^ -+^-nL.,, and active fr-equencies' """."ti* the standby "nip-nop" Channel numbers to be recalled "iJitr"" ;J;;d;"G""i* -J-ii" ".-".ponding is momentarilv displaved in the ac^tive (USE) chu.'r,"l n,t-b"" ;":;;;;;Til i."o,l"n"v altpluv and the conesponding frequency is displayed in rhe STANDBY pllot t' progam f""ouenc-v displav. The Channel Programming mode allows the T\rning mode Direct The of operation *ode Ctt""t"r in" i;;;;"'";;i;; """-i" *rii"n aro*t freq'encv changes to be made directlv into the i:: ;;::l:;;-;il active frequincY disPlaY' Large self-diurming gas discharge readouts- displav -:!.. '1" :"3:yI11t:I featur" fti- tso s ,tiiq,l"-'nip-flop" pre-select rvui rrreqr'! TPt^"-t "."t#g'i""q"*"-i"".-C-ft'" one tiequency rn [ne slal to store "ir-t"r"ft""g" the; inst.antly with the touch of a button' Both the called il"" frequencies are stored in a circuit component standby thJ ii;.SEi."a b"ei"oli'ieb";rr"Jiv irt"."6r" Read ontv Memory) thaL provides .non-volatile and prograrnmed channels so that when the radio is turned i"."*" "f'fi"qt"""iei tn"n back on, channel inlormation is retained' oii Eta!ur6 I:: "ia an automatic squelch To override the automatic The COMM incorporates is pulled out Push the knob back in t'o knob c'ontiol ifti"".ft-" ."""f"it, relactivate the automatic squelch. SUPPLEMENT 28 1 June 1987 1of I SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENIS MODEL 406 OPERATING COMM FREQUENCY DISPLAY (USE) - Displays active communication frequency or the cbann€I number when selecting or programming channels. TRANSMIT INDICATOR tmnsmit mode. , "T, appears to indicat€ that the transceiver is in me 3. STANDBI COMM FREQUENCY DISPLAY (STANDBY) - Disptays Btsrdby commu, nication frequeDcy or during channel pro$ameing the programrned frequeoiy is dis- I. I,,TOOT a. TNBQUENCY/CHANNEL SELECTOR: FREQUENCY MODE The outer, lalge! sele€tor knob is used to chanse the MHz portion of the frequency display: the smalt knob chanses the kHz p6rtion. This smalle_r k-nob is designed to .hange rhe indicated frequenry in sr,ps of sd-kHz when ;t f!t{ -11, and in 25 kHz steps when it is pu ed out. At eitirer band_edge of the f8-135 MHz frequency spectrum, sn offscab;ot tion will wrap the displa! around f_ the other frequency band-edge (i.e_, 185 MHz advances to 118 MHz). b. CHANNEL MODE - The small knob when pulted out s€lects channels I thru 9. Channel numb€B without. a programmed frequency will be skipped. The s€lected urranner numDer w'lt b€ dl.sptay€d for approximately 2 seconds in active frcquency drspky and. ihe conesponding programmed fr€quency is displayed in the stsndby rrequency drsphy. lhe out€r, larger s€lector knob snd the $rxaller knob (when it is pNhed in) tunction as described in "a". except that the smaller knob always changes the indicat€d frequency in 25-kHz steps. c. CHANNEL PROGRAMMINC MODE channels 0 thru 9. - The small knob when pulled out serecrc (1). .With Channel 0 displayed , The smal knob when pushed in setects either , , which indicat* opemtion in the Frequency mode or UUU which indicates operation in the Channel Elode. Figure 1. King KY-196 Tranceiver (Sheet 1 of 2) SUPPLEMENT 28 2ot8 1 June 1987 sEcTtoN 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 (2) With a Channel Number I thlu 9 displaved - wiih small knob pushed in' s€lects ihi frequency in the standby display in 25 KHz st€ps. The out€r' larger selector knob functions as desnibed in "a". d. DIRECT-TUMNC MODE - The kDobs tunction as descdbed COMM VOLUME CONTROL (OFF/PULL TEST) in "a"' - Rotarv switch/potentiometlr which, when turned clockwise, applies power t the KY-196 and adjr8ts volume of communication rec€iver audio. WL-n puiled out disables automatic squelch and allows bsckground nois€ to be heaid to vedfy squelch test. (<+) - Int€'-changes-the frequencies sf,tNosv displays. when pressed and held depressed for.3 S€conals, ahe usE "ita Programming mod€. When held depressed while the radro power 1l select€ the Cb-annel tumed on, selects the Direct-Tuning mode COMM FREQUENCY TRANSFER BUTTON i; Figure 1. King KY-196 Tranceiver (Sheet 2 of 2) SUPPLEMENT 28 1 June 1987 3of8 SECTION 9 MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENTS All controls for the Kine KY-196 are mounted on the front Danel of the -transmitt€r. Control lighting is provided by the instrument panel flood system. Operation and description of the audio control panel used rn with this radio are shown and described in Supplement 26 in Section of this handbook. SECTION 2 LIMITATIONS There is no change to the ai4larre limitations when this avionic equipment is installed. sEcTroN 3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when this avionic pment is installed. However, if the frequency readouts fail, the following should be followed. RADIO DISPLAY FAILURE: 1. COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST -- TURN counterclockwise to OFF position. 2. 3. -- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED. COMM Transfer Button (+) COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise; pull out and adjust to desired audio level; push control back in to activate the automatic squelch. NOTE The radio is now in the Direct Tuning Mode. The active and standby ftequencies are set tp 120.00 MHz. The frequency selector knobs can be used to dilectly tune the active hequency. 4. MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL Selector - The outer, larger selector knob will change the numbers to the left of the decimal one MHz per click. The smaller knob when pushed in changes the number to the right of the decimal 50 kHz per click and 25 kHz per click when pulled out. Therefore if the frequency 121.50 was desired, the larger knob would be turned one click clockwise and the smalle! knob pushed in and tumed 10 clicks either clockwise or counterclockwise. SUPPLEMENT 28 4of8 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SECTION 4 NORMAL PROCEDURES OPERATING MODE SELECTION' 1. COMM Volume Conhol (OFF/?ULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise until radio comes on. 2. Coili4 Transfer Button ('<+) '- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED 3. "' selector .-- lul-l our and ilbffETFiiEanENcY/cHANNEL -tmall (0) appears in the active flequency zero unti.l knob iib-t"ale tl" for three secondB. n. displav. RoTATE' i,r-6frinnEeuENcY/CHANNEL Selector -- PUSH IN and Select either --- or UUU' freWten the MODE Selector knob is rotat€d, the standby que""v Jispluv *i[ altemate between --- and UUU' a. The FREQUENCY Mode is selected when dashes (--) are pLaved. t. lTi drfeNNel, Mode is select€d when (UUU) is displaved' -- PRESS to retum to the 5. COMM Trarefer Button (*) operating mode. NOTE th€ unit will Aft.er 20 seconds of no switch/selector activity', mooe' op€latrng autoDatically retum to the select€d FREOUENCY MODE t?ivV#r.ift iiiot{-nncervEn-rRAN sM lrrE R o PERArlo N: -- SET tpthis mdio' Selector Switch (on audio control .panel). 1. MIC ^Sfi;fiil/iioNE (on control panel) -- sET audio Selectoi-B'rttons ;. this radio, :. " 6drriffi'voru-" ;;;.al,l"lL ,. Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise' aoi""a u"dio leve! push control back in to activate -ilSo'6li#b"t!"$;ocY/cHANNEL serector Knobs sELEcr "F".t#y"'$"iff*J+8flt.s"1GJ.*1,;.i*i:3,B"5*ll;i;'SUPPLEMENT 28 1 June 1987 5of8 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 Mike Button: To Transmit -- DEPRESS and SPEAK into microDhone. a. NOTE o During COMM trarsmission, a lighted ,,T, will appear between the "USE" and 'STANDBY" displays to indicat€ that the transceiver is operating in the transmit mode. a Phone sidetone may be eelected by pushing the AUTO selector button (on audio control panel) in the phone position, b. To Receive -- RELEASE mike button. CHANNEL MODE MMUMCATION RECETVER-TRANSMITTER OPERATION: 1. 2. 3. 4. MIC Selector Switch (on audio control panel) -- SET to this radio. SPEAKER/PHONE Selector Buttons (on audio control panel) -- SET t this radio. COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise: pull out and adjust to desired audio leve! push control back in to activate'the automatic squelch. MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL Setector Knobs -- SELECT desired operating channel (Pull out and rotate smaller knob). NOTE The Channel number will be displayed in the active display and the correspo-nding programmed frequency in rhe standbi display. The Channel number will only be displayed for approx! mately 2 seconds, after which the o ginal aitive frequency will again be displayed. COMM Tr-ansfer Button (+) -- PRESS to transfe! the progratlmed frequency ftom the "STANDBY" display into the "USE" dispiay. MIC Button: 6. a. To Transmit -- DEPRESS and SPEAX into microphone. NOTE . qurilq_qOMM transmission, a light€d ,"T" will appear between the'USE" and "STANDBY" displays to indicate that the tra.rl_ sceive! is operating in the transmit mode. SUPPLEMENT 28 6of8 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 a selector Phone sidetone may be selected by pushing the .AUTO button (on audio control panel) in the phoDe posrtron' CHANNEL PROGRAMMING MODE OPERATION: 1. COMM Transfer Button z. aecon(l8. -- PRESS and HOLD depressed for ftriiiHlrnneuENCY/cHANNEL selector Krobs -- OPERATE as fol lows: until the desired Knob -- PULL OUT and ROTATE -"]""S-"U n"-Ue. (1 tbfl 9) apPears in the active display' b. Smslt Knob -- PUSH IN. L"tg"i Xt"U -- ROTATE to select the MHz portion of the ". a. e. f. of the frequencv the- kHz -portion Bteps' 25 kHz in is changed frequency ttte in Gs--ode, to I channels; i""*"i i""u -- ROT;\TE'Io pro$am in up Lo ---' When 135 from countprcloikwise --or i" fr;i--l18 whose chamel i" tft" CUel.INnl mode, any Siilfiti<".t -- ROTATE to select u"tit At tU" desired channels are programmed' COMM T"aosfer Button -- PRESS to return to the s€lected mode. NOTE o- After 20 seconds of no switch/selector activity'. the unit will automatically retuin to the selected operating mode' q,still a While in the Channel Programming mode the. radio unantuned to the active frequency which was active when lhe nel Programning mode was entered DIRECT-TUNING MODE OPERATION: 1. z. COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN to OFF Position' b"OMU ti"-"r"r Button (<-) -- PRESS and HOLD DEPRESSED. SUPPLEMENT 28 1 June 1987 7 ol 8 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS 3. MODEL 406 COMM Volume Control (OFF/PULL TEST) -- TURN clockwise until radio comes on. NOTE The radio is now in the DIRECT-TUNING mode. Both the active and standby frequencies are set to 120.0 MHz and the radio tuning set to the FREQUENCY mode of opemtion. When the MODEAREQUENCY/CHANNEL selector knobs are rctated, the frequency change will be made directly into the active frequency display. MODE/I'REQUENCY/CHANNEL Selector -- ROTATE to directly se- lect active frequency. r ) -- PRESS whenever COMM Transfer Button ( . return to the FREQUENCY mode of operation. it is desired to sEcTtoN 5 PERFORMANCE There is no change to the airplane performance when this avionic equipment inetalled. However, this installation of an externally mounted ant€nna or several related extemal ani€nnas, will reeult in a minor reduction in cmise is Derfolmance. SUPPLEMENT 28 SofB 1 June 1987 SECTION 9 SUPPLEMENTS MODEL 406 SUPPLEMENT KING DME (Type KN'63) sEcTloN 1 GENERAL DME (Tlpe KN-63) is the airborne ."interrogator" portion ofin-a The Ki.ng -tu'"tu. wbich supplies continuous' accurate'-slant range distance ""ui*iion n""d g"ound shtion t'o an airplane in flight' ii"-?rii"t'ril^ ri t:t":5d,lt--t*"IH: lvr selection of the ---- operating -r ' Except D^LEP! for 9tr1nnet,.;vhl9) King DME is capable navigation receiver frequency sele( Iwitches, the r.r\r


Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Creator                         : Canon
Modify Date                     : 2012:04:28 10:23:32+04:00
Producer                        : CutePDF 3.6 (www.cutepdf.com)
Subject                         : 
Title                           : 
Create Date                     : 2012:04:28 10:23:32+04:00
Author                          : 
Page Count                      : 692
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu